LEXMARK

X544dn - Printer LEXMARK - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free X544dn LEXMARK in PDF.

📄 258 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question
Notice LEXMARK X544dn - page 11
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.

User questions about X544dn LEXMARK

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Printer in PDF format for free! Find your manual X544dn - LEXMARK and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. X544dn by LEXMARK.

USER MANUAL X544dn LEXMARK

August 2009 www.lexmark.com

Machine type:

7525

Model numbers:

131, 133, 138, 332, 333, 336, 337, 352, 356, 382, 383, 386, 387

Contents

Safety information....11

Learning about the printer....13

Finding information about the printer....13

Selecting a location for the printer....14

Printer configurations....16

Basic functions of the scanner....16

Understanding the ADF and scanner glass....17

Understanding the printer control panel....17

Additional printer setup....23

Installing internal options....23

Available options 23

Installing a memory card 23

Installing a flash memory or font card 27

Installing hardware options....30

Installing an optional tray or drawer 30

Attaching cables....32

Verifying printer setup....33

Printing menu settings pages 34

Printing a network setup page 34

Setting up the printer software....34

Installing printer software 34

Updating available options in the printer driver....35

Setting up wireless printing....35

Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network.... 35

Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows) 36

Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)....38

Installing the printer on a wired network 40

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact....43

Saving paper and toner....43

Using recycled paper and other office papers....43

Conserving supplies....44

Saving energy....45

Using Eco-Mode 45

Reducing printer noise 46

Adjusting Power Saver 46

Recycling....47

Recycling Lexmark products....47

Recycling Lexmark packaging....47

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling....47

Loading paper and specialty media....48

Linking and unlinking trays....48

Linking trays....48

Unlinking trays....48

Assigning a Custom Type name....48

Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type....49

Configuring Universal paper settings....49

Loading the standard 250-sheet tray and optional 550-sheet tray....50

Loading the 650-sheet duo drawer....53

Using the multipurpose feeder....54

Using the manual feeder....56

Paper and specialty media guide....58

Paper guidelines....58

Paper characteristics....58

Unacceptable paper 59

Selecting paper....59

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead....59

Storing paper....60

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights....60

Paper sizes supported by the printer 60

Paper types supported by the printer 61

Paper types and weights supported by the printer 62

Paper capacities....64

Printing....65

Printing a document....65

Printing on specialty media....66

Tips on using letterhead....66

Tips on using transparencies....67

Tips on using envelopes....67

Tips on using paper labels....68

Tips on using card stock....69

Printing from a flash drive....70

Supported flash drives and file types....71

Printing photos from a PictBridge-enabled digital camera....71

Printing information pages....72

Printing a font sample list....72

Printing a directory list....72

Printing the print quality test pages....72

Canceling a print job....73

Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 73

Canceling a print job from the computer 73

Copying....75

Making copies....75

Making a quick copy....75

Copying using the ADF....75

Copying using the scanner glass 76

Copying photos....76

Copying on specialty media....76

Copying to transparencies 76

Copying to letterhead....77

Customizing copy settings....77

Copying from one size to another 77

Making copies using paper from a selected tray 78

Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)....78

Reducing or enlarging copies 79

Making a copy lighter or darker 79

Adjusting copy quality....80

Collating copies....80

Placing separator sheets between copies 81

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet 81

Canceling a copy job....82

Improving copy quality....82

E-mailing....83

Getting ready to e-mail....83

Setting up the e-mail function....83

Setting up the address book 84

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server....84

E-mailing a document....84

Sending an e-mail using the keypad 84

Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number 85

Sending an e-mail using the address book....86

Canceling an e-mail....86

Faxing....87

Getting the printer ready to fax....87

Initial fax setup....88

Choosing a fax connection....89

Connecting to an analog telephone line 90

Connecting to a DSL service 90

Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system....91

Connecting to a Distinctive Ring Service 91

Connecting a telephone or answering machine to the same telephone line....92

Connecting to an adapter for your country or region....93

Connecting to a computer with a modem....98

Setting the outgoing fax name and number....100

Setting the date and time....100

Turning daylight saving time on or off 100

Sending a fax....101

Sending a fax using the printer control panel....101

Sending a fax using the computer 101

Creating shortcuts....102

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server....102

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel 103

Using shortcuts and the address book....103

Using fax destination shortcuts....103

Using the address book....104

Customizing fax settings....104

Changing the fax resolution 104

Making a fax lighter or darker 104

Sending a fax at a scheduled time....105

Viewing a fax log....105

Canceling an outgoing fax....105

Understanding fax options....106

Original Size 106

Content....106

Sides (Duplex) 106

Resolution....106

Darkness....106

Improving fax quality....107

Forwarding a fax....107

Scanning to an FTP address....108

Scanning to an FTP address....108

Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad 108

Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number....109

Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server....109

Scanning to a computer or USB flash memory device.....110

Scanning to a computer....110

Scanning to a USB flash memory device....111

Understanding scan to computer options....112

Sides (Duplex) 112

Darkness....112

Improving scan quality....112

Using the Scan Center software....112

Understanding the Scan Center features....112

Using the ScanBack utility....113

Using the ScanBack Utility....113

Clearing jams....114

Avoiding jams....114

Understanding jam numbers and locations....115

200 paper jam....116

201 paper jam....116

202 paper jam....117

230 paper jam....119

235 paper jam....119

242 and 243 paper jams....119

250 paper jam....120

290 paper jam....120

Understanding printer menus....122

Menus list....122

Supplies menu....123

Paper menu....123

Default Source menu....123

Size/Type menu....124

Paper Texture menu 126

Paper Weight menu....128

Paper Loading menu 129

Custom Types menu....130

Custom Scan Sizes menu 131

Universal Setup menu....131

Reports menu....132

Reports menu....132

Network/Ports....133

Active NIC menu....133

Network menu....133

Wireless menu....134

USB menu 135

Settings menu....137

General Settings menu 137

Copy Settings menu 140

Fax Settings menu....142

Flash Drive menu 148

Print Settings 151

Set Date and Time 160

Understanding printer messages....162

List of status and error messages....162

Maintaining the printer....176

Storing supplies....176

Checking the status of supplies....176

Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel....176

Checking the status of supplies from a network computer....176

Ordering supplies....177

Ordering toner cartridges....177

Ordering imaging kits 178

Ordering a waste toner bottle....178

Replacing supplies....179

Replacing the waste toner bottle 179

Replacing a black imaging kit ....182

Replacing a black and color imaging kit 188

Replacing a toner cartridge....193

Replacing a developer unit 195

Cleaning the exterior of the printer....201

Cleaning the scanner glass....202

Moving the printer....202

Before moving the printer 202

Moving the printer to another location....203

Shipping the printer 203

Administrative support....204

Finding advanced networking and administrator information....204

Restoring the factory default settings....204

Using the Embedded Web Server....204

Setting up e-mail alerts....205

Viewing reports....205

Troubleshooting....206

Solving basic printer problems....206

Solving printing problems....206

Multiple-language PDFs do not print....206

Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds....206

Error message about reading USB drive appears....206

Jobs do not print....207

Job takes longer than expected to print 207

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper 208

Incorrect or strange characters print....208

Tray linking does not work....208

Large jobs do not collate 208

Unexpected page breaks occur....209

Solving copy problems....209

Copier does not respond 209

Scanner unit does not close....209

Poor copy quality 210

Partial document or photo copies....211

Solving scanner problems....211

Checking an unresponsive scanner ....211

Scan was not successful 212

Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer....212

Poor scanned image quality 212

Partial document or photo scans....213

Cannot scan from a computer ....213

Solving fax problems....213

Caller ID is not shown....213

Cannot send or receive a fax....214

Can send but not receive faxes....215

Can receive but not send faxes....216

Received fax has poor print quality....216

Blocking junk faxes....217

Solving option problems....217

Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed 217

Drawers....218

Multipurpose feeder....218

Memory card 219

Solving paper feed problems....219

Paper frequently jams....219

Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared 219

Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam....219

Solving print quality problems....220

Blank pages....220

Characters have jagged or uneven edges 220

Clipped images....221

Dark lines 221

Gray background 221

Incorrect margins....222

Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line....222

Paper curl....223

Print irregularities 223

Repeating defects....224

Skewed print....224

Print is too light 224

Print is too dark....226

Solid color pages....227

Toner fog or background shading appears on the page 227

Toner rubs off....227

Toner specks....228

Transparency print quality is poor....228

Uneven print density 229

Solving color quality problems....229

Color misregistration....229

FAQ about color printing....230

Embedded Web Server does not open....233

Check the network connections ....233

Check the network settings 233

Contacting Customer Support....233

Notices....234

Product information....234

Edition notice....234

Power consumption....238

Index......252

Safety information

Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.

Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.

LEXMARK X544dn - Safety information - 1

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions. You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.

LEXMARK X544dn - Safety information - 2

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

Use care when you replace a lithium battery.

LEXMARK X544dn - Safety information - 3

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace it only with the same or an equivalent type of lithium battery. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.

LEXMARK X544dn - Safety information - 4

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to move it safely.

LEXMARK X544dn - Safety information - 5

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:

  • Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
  • Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
  • Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time.

Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.

Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.

Use only the telecommunications (RJ-11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.

LEXMARK X544dn - Safety information - 6

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

LEXMARK X544dn - Safety information - 7

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.

This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.

LEXMARK X544dn - Safety information - 8

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls. If the power cord is misused, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of misuse. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.

Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a professional service person.

LEXMARK X544dn - Safety information - 9

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.

LEXMARK X544dn - Safety information - 10

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Learning about the printer

Finding information about the printer

Setup information

Description Where to find
The Setup information gives you instructions for setting up the printer. Follow the set of instructions for local, network, or wireless, depending on what you need.You can find the Setup information in the printer box or on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.

Wireless Setup Guide

Description Where to find
If your printer has built-in wireless functionality, a Wireless Setup Guide gives you instructions for connecting the printer wirelessly.You can find the Wireless Setup Guide in the printer box or on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.

Help

Description Where to find
The Help gives you instructions for using the software.While in any Lexmark software program, click Help, Tips → Help, or Help → Help Topics.

Customer support

Description Where to find (North America) Where to find (rest of world)
Telephone supportCall us atUS: 1-800-332-4120Monday–Friday (8:00 AM–11:00 PM ET)Saturday (Noon–6:00 PM ET)Canada: 1-800-539-6275Monday–Friday (8:00 AM–11:00 PM ET)Saturday (Noon–6:00 PM ET)Mexico: 001-888-377-0063Monday–Friday (8:00 AM–8:00 PM ET)Note: Telephone numbers and support times may change without notice. For the most recent telephone numbers available, see the printed warranty statement that came with your printer.
E-mail supportFor e-mail support, visit our Web site: www.lexmark.com.1 Click SUPPORT.2 Click Technical Support.3 Select your printer type.4 Select your printer model.5 From the Support Tools section, click e-Mail Support.6 Complete the form, and then click Submit Request.

Selecting a location for the printer

When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any options, leave enough room for them also. It is important to:

  • Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard.
  • Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
  • Keep the printer:

—Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators
—Free from direct sunlight, humidity extremes, or temperature fluctuations
—Clean, dry, and free of dust

- Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:

LEXMARK X544dn - Selecting a location for the printer - 1

text_image 31.37 kg (69.15 lbs) 5 4 2 3 1
1102 mm (4 in.)
2508 mm (20 in.)
3152 mm (6 in.)
476 mm (3 in.)
5254 mm (10 in.)

Printer configurations

Basic models

LEXMARK X544dn - Basic models - 1

text_image Technical diagram of a printer with numbered parts for identification and assembly reference.
1Printer control panel
2Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
3Standard exit bin
4Top door latch
5Right side cover
6Standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1)
7Manual feeder
8650-sheet duo drawer with integrated multipurpose feeder (Tray 2)
9Optional 550-sheet tray (Tray 3)

Basic functions of the scanner

The scanner provides copy, fax, and scan-to-network capability for workgroups. You can:

• Make quick copies, or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs
- Send a fax using the printer control panel.
- Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
- Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, an FTP server, or a USB flash memory device.

Understanding the ADF and scanner glass

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Scanner glass

LEXMARK X544dn - Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Scanner glass - 1

natural_image Illustration of a printer with paper and a red arrow indicating compression (no text or symbols)

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.

LEXMARK X544dn - Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Scanner glass - 2

natural_image Illustration of an open printer with a red arrow pointing to the inner page, showing no text or symbols.

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.

Using the ADF

The ADF can scan multiple pages including duplex (two-sided) pages. When using the ADF:

Note: Duplex scanning is not available on selected printer models.

  • Load the document into the ADF faceup, short edge first.
  • Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper into the ADF.
  • Scan sizes from 125 x 216 mm (4.9 x 8.5 in.) wide to 127 x 356 mm (5 x 14 in.) long.
  • Scan media weights from 52 to 120g / m^2 (14 to 32 lb).

- Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Using the scanner glass

The scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages. When using the scanner glass:

  • Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
  • Scan or copy documents up to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
    • Copy books up to 12.7 mm (0.5 in.) thick.

Understanding the printer control panel

Note: Some features are not available on selected printer models.

LEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 1

text_image Control panel with labeled buttons and display screen, showing three numbered labels (1, 2, 3) for interface control.
Item Description
1Selections and settingsSelect a function such as Copy, Scan, Email, or Fax. Change default copy and scan settings such as the number of copies, duplex printing, copy options, and scaling. Use the address book when scanning to e-mail.
2Display areaView scanning, copying, faxing, and printing options as well as status and error messages. Access the administration menus, start, stop, or cancel a print job.
3Keypad area Enter numbersbers, letters, or symbols on the display, print using the USB flash memory device, or change the default fax settings.

LEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 2

text_image 1 Copy Scan/Email Fax 2 Context Text Text/Photo Photo 3 Copy Copies 4 Scal Options 5 Fax 6 7 8 9 10
Item Description
1CopyLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 3Press the Copy button to enter the copy function.
2ContentLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 4Press the Content button to enhance copy, scan, e-mail, or fax quality. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo.
3CopiesLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 5Press the Copies button to enter the number of copies to print.
4ScaleLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 6Press the Scale button to change the size of the copied document to fit onto the currently selected paper size.
5OptionsLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 7Press the Options button to change Original Size, Paper Source, Paper Saver, and Collate settings.
6Address BookLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 8Press to enter the address book.
7DarknessLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 9Press the Darkness button to adjust the current darkness settings.
8Duplex 2-SidedLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 10Press the Duplex 2-Sided button to scan or print on both sides of the paper.Note: The duplex feature is not available on selected printer models.
9FaxLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 11Press the Fax button to enter the fax function.Note: Fax mode is not available on selected printer models.
10Scan/EmailLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 12Press the Scan/Email button to enter the scan or scan to e-mail function.

LEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 13

text_image Menu 1 2 Stop/Cancel Back Select Start Black Color 5 6 7 8 9 10
Item Description
1MenuLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 14Press to enter the administration menus.
2Display View scanning, copying, faxing, and printing options as well as status and error messagesNote: The fax feature is not available on selected printer models.
3Stop/CancelLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 15Press to stop all printer activity.
4Color startLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 16Press to copy or scan in color.
5Black startLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 17Press to copy or scan in black and white.
6Right arrowLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 18Press to scroll right.
7SelectLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 19Press to accept menu selections and settings.
8Left arrowLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 20Press to scroll left.
9Indicator lightIndicates the printer status:Off—The power is off.Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.Blinking red—Operator intervention is needed.
10BackLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 21Press to return one screen at a time to the Ready screen.Note: An error beep sounds when you press if a flash drive is connected and the USB menu is displayed.

Note: The fax buttons, keypad, and USB port are not available on selected printer models.

LEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 22

text_image 1 Fax 2 Redell/Passo 1gL 2ABC 3DEF 4 5JL 6MHO 7 PQBS 8TUV 9WXYZ 0 Hook Shonaute 3 4 5 6
Item Description
1Redial/PauseLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 23Press the Redial/Pause button to cause a two- or three-second dial pause in a fax number. In the Fax To: field, a Dial Pause is represented by a comma (,).From the home screen, press the Redial/Pause button to redial a fax number.The button functions only within the Fax menu or with fax functions. When outside of the Fax menu, fax function, or home screen, pressing the Redial/Pause button causes an error beep.
2Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols on the display.LEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 24
3Front USB port Let you scan to a flash drive or print supported file typesLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 25Note:When a USB flash memory device is inserted into the printer, the printer can only scan to the USB device or print files from the USB device. All other printer functions are unavailable.
4ShortcutsLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 26Press to enter the shortcut screen.
5HookLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 27Press to take the line off-hook (like picking up a phone receiver). Press a second time to hang up the line.
6OptionsLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 28Press the Options button to change Original Size, Broadcast, Delayed Send, and Cancel settings.
7ResolutionLEXMARK X544dn - Understanding the printer control panel - 29Press the Resolution button to select a dpi value for the scan.Note:Press or to scroll through the values, and then press to enter a value.

Additional printer setup

Installing internal options

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing internal options - 1

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards. The instructions in this section explain how to install the available cards; you can also use them to locate a card for removal.

Available options

Note: Certain options are not available on selected printer models.

Memory cards

  • Printer memory
  • Flash memory
  • Font cards

Installing a memory card

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing a memory card - 1

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Note: This task requires a #2 Phillips screwdriver.

1 Access the system board on the back of the printer.

a Turn the screws on the cover counterclockwise, and then remove them.
b Gently pull the cover away from the printer, and then remove it.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing a memory card - 2

text_image Technical diagram showing internal components of a computer with red arrows indicating directional flow or movement, including labeled parts and circuit boards.

Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

2 Use the illustration below to locate the connector.

Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing a memory card - 3

natural_image 3D diagram of an internal electronic device showing internal components and wiring (no text or symbols)
1Flash memory or font card connector
2Memory card connector

3 Open the memory card connector latches.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing a memory card - 4

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical device with red arrows indicating rotational motion (no text or symbols)

Additional printer setup

4 Unpack the memory card.

Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.

5 Align the notches on the memory card with the ridges on the connector.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing a memory card - 5

text_image Diagram showing two components labeled 1 and 2 with a red arrow indicating direction, likely illustrating a mechanical or electrical assembly.
1Notches
2Ridges

6 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it snaps into place.

7 Reinstall the system board cover.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing a memory card - 6

text_image Technical diagram showing internal components of a computer with red arrows indicating motion or force directions, including part layout and assembly.

Installing a flash memory or font card

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing a flash memory or font card - 1

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

1 Access the system board on the back of the printer.

a Turn the screws on the cover counterclockwise, and then remove them. b Gently pull the cover away from the printer, and then remove it.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing a flash memory or font card - 2

text_image Technical diagram showing internal components of a computer with red arrows indicating directional flow, including labeled parts and circuit boards.

Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

2 Use the illustration below to locate the connector.

Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing a flash memory or font card - 3

natural_image 3D diagram of an internal electronic device showing internal components and wiring (no text or symbols)
1Flash memory or font card connector
2Memory card connector

3 Unpack the flash memory or font card.

Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.

4 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board. This ensures the metal pins line up correctly as well.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing a flash memory or font card - 4

natural_image 3D diagram of a mechanical assembly with labeled parts (1 and 2), showing internal components and connections without any readable text or symbols.
1Plastic pins
2Metal pins

5 Push the card firmly into place.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing a flash memory or font card - 5

natural_image 3D diagram of a mechanical assembly with a green panel and a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Notes:

  • The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.
  • Be careful not to damage the connectors.

6 Reinstall the system board cover.

LEXMARK X544dn - Notes: - 1

text_image Technical diagram showing internal components of a computer with Chinese annotations indicating red arrows pointing to specific areas.

Installing hardware options

Installing an optional tray or drawer

The printer supports two additional input sources: an optional 550-sheet tray and a 650-sheet duo drawer (Tray 2) with an integrated multipurpose feeder.

Note: Some printer models may not support the optional 550-sheet tray.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing an optional tray or drawer - 1

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.

1 Unpack the optional 550-sheet tray, and then remove all packing material and the dust cover.

2 Place the tray in the location chosen for the printer.

Note: If you are installing both the optional tray and the 650-sheet duo drawer, the optional 550-sheet tray must always be installed as the first tray (configuring from the bottom up).

3 Align the 650-sheet duo drawer with the optional 550-sheet tray, and then lower it into place.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing an optional tray or drawer - 2

natural_image 3D technical illustration of a printer's internal structure showing top and front views (no text or symbols)

4 Align the printer with the 650-sheet duo drawer, then lower the printer into place and install the dust covers.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing an optional tray or drawer - 3

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to move it safely.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing an optional tray or drawer - 4

natural_image Illustration of a printer with a red arrow indicating compression or disassembly process (no text or symbols present)

Note: Once the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see "Updating available options in the printer driver" on page 35.

Attaching cables

1 Connect the printer to a computer or a network.

- For a local connection, use a USB cable.

- For a network connection, use an Ethernet cable.

Notes:

- For fax connections, see "Initial fax setup" on page 88.

- Make sure the software is installed before turning the printer on. For more information, see the Setup Guide.

2 Connect the power cord to the printer first and then to a wall outlet.

LEXMARK X544dn - Notes: - 1

text_image Technical diagram of an electronic device showing labeled components including ports, ventilation slots, and a main panel.
1Power cord socket
2Ethernet portNote: The Ethernet port is a feature on network models only.
3USB port

Verifying printer setup

Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following:

  • Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly. Remove the option and install it again.
  • Network setup page—If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network, print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

Printing menu settings pages

Print menu settings pages to review the current menu settings and to verify printer options are installed correctly.

Note: If you have not made any menu item settings changes yet, then the menu settings pages list all the factory default settings. Once you select and save other settings from the menus, they replace the factory default settings as user default settings. A user default setting remains in effect until you access the menu again, choose another value, and save it. To restore the factory default settings, see "Restoring the factory default settings" on page 204.

1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 From the printer control panel, press
3 Press the arrow buttons until Reports appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Menu Settings Page appears, and then press √.

After the menu settings pages print, Ready appears.

Printing a network setup page

If the printer is attached to a network, print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 From the printer control panel, press
3 Press the arrow buttons until Reports appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Network Setup Page appears, and then press √.

After the network setup page prints, Ready appears.

5 Check the first section on the network setup page, and confirm that Status is "Connected."

If Status is "Not Connected," the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning. Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.

Setting up the printer software

Installing printer software

A printer driver is software that lets the computer communicate with the printer. The printer software is typically installed during the initial printer setup. If you need to install the software after setup, follow these instructions:

For Windows users

1 Close all open software programs.
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
3 From the main installation dialog, click Install.
4 Follow the instructions on the screen.

For Macintosh users

1 Close all open software applications.
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
3 From the Finder desktop, double-click the printer CD icon that automatically appears.
4 Double-click the Install icon.
5 Follow the instructions on the screen.

Using the World Wide Web

1 Go to the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
2 From the Drivers & Downloads menu, click Driver Finder.
3 Select your printer, and then select your operating system.
4 Download the driver and install the printer software.

Updating available options in the printer driver

Once the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs.

For Windows users

1 Click, or click Start and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run box, type control printers.
3 Press Enter, or click OK.
The printer folder opens.
4 Select the printer.

Note: If the printer has a fax option, choose the appropriate printer model with the letters "PS."

5 Right-click the printer, and then select Properties.

6 Click the Install Options tab.

7 Under Available Options, add any installed hardware options.

Note: If the printer has a fax option, select Fax and then add it as an installed option.

8 Click Apply.

Setting up wireless printing

Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network

Note: Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.

- SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.

- Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc.

- Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to auto for infrastructure networks.

Some ad hoc networks will also require the auto setting. Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select.

• Security Method—There are three basic options for Security Method:

-WEP key

If your network uses more than one WEP key, enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the Default WEP Transmit Key.

or

-WPA or WPA2 passphrase

WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network.

—No security

If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.

Note: Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended.

If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network using the Advanced method, then you may need the following:

  • Authentication type
    •Inner authentication type
    •802.1X username and password
    •Certificates

Note: For more information on configuring 802.1X security, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD.

Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)

Before you install the printer on a wireless network, make sure that:

-Your wireless network is set up and working properly.
- The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.
1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn the printer on.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows) - 1

text_image Diagram showing cable connection between a device and an electrical outlet, labeled with numbered components.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows) - 2

natural_image Illustration of a printer with an attached cable and a magnified inset showing a red arrow pointing to the printer's screen (no text or symbols present)

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows) - 3

Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows) - 4

Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the screen.

2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows) - 5

3 Click Install Printer and Software.

4 Click Agree to agree to the License Agreement.

5 Click Suggested, and then click Next.

6 Click Wireless Network Attach.

7 Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.

LEXMARK X544dn - Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows) - 6

text_image Diagram showing cable connection between a computer and a server, with labeled components and cable insertion instructions

Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so you can print wirelessly.

8 Follow the instructions on the computer screen to complete the software installation.

Note: Basic is the recommended path to choose. Choose Advanced only if you want to customize your installation.

9 To allow other computers on the wireless network to use the wireless printer, follow steps 2 through 6 and step 8 for each computer.

Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)

Prepare to configure the printer

1 Locate the printer MAC address on the sheet that shipped with the printer. Write the last six digits of the MAC address in the space provided below:

MAC address: ____ ____ ____ ____

2 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn the power on.

LEXMARK X544dn - Prepare to configure the printer - 1

text_image Diagram showing cable connection between a device and a power outlet, labeled with numbered components.

LEXMARK X544dn - Prepare to configure the printer - 2

natural_image Illustration of a printer with a paper airplane and cable, showing no text or symbols on the device itself.

Enter the printer information

1 Access the AirPort options.

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
b Click Network.
c Click AirPort.

In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier

a From the Finder desktop, choose Go > Applications.
b From the Applications folder, double-click Internet Connect.
c From the toolbar, click AirPort.

2 From the Network pop-up menu, select print server xxxxxx, where the x's are the last six digits of the MAC address located on the MAC address sheet.
3 Open the Safari browser.
4 From the Bookmarks drop-down menu, select Show.
5 Under Collections, select Bonjour or Rendezvous, and then double-click the printer name.

Note: The application is referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10.3, but is now called Bonjour by Apple Computer.

6 From the main page of the Embedded Web Server, navigate to the page where the wireless settings information is stored.

Configure the printer for wireless access

1 Type the name of your network (SSID) in the appropriate field.
2 Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode if you are using a wireless router.
3 Select the type of security you use to protect your wireless network.
4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to join your wireless network.
5 Click Submit.
6 Open the AirPort application on your computer:

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
b Click Network.
c Click AirPort.

In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier

a From the Finder desktop, click Go > Applications.
b From the Applications folder, double-click Internet Connect.
c From the toolbar, click AirPort.

7 From the Network pop-up menu, select your wireless network.

Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly

To print to a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file and create a printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.

1 Install a PPD file on the computer:

a Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive.
b Double-click the installer package for the printer.
c From the Welcome screen, click Continue.
d Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file.
e Click Continue after viewing the license agreement, and then click Agree to accept the terms of the agreement.
f Select a Destination, and then click Continue.

g From the Easy Install screen, click Install.

h Type the user password, and then click OK.

All necessary software is installed on the computer.

i Click Restart when installation is complete.

2 Add the printer:

a For IP printing:

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.

3 Click+.
4 Click IP.
5 Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field.
6 Click Add.

In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier

1 From the Finder desktop, choose Go > Applications.
2 Double-click the Utilities folder.
3 Locate and double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
4 From the Printer List, choose Add.
5 Click IP.
6 Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field.
7 Click Add.

b For AppleTalk printing:

In Mac OS X version 10.5

1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.
3 Click+.
4 Click AppleTalk.
5 Select the printer from the list.
6 Click Add.

In Mac OS X version 10.4

1 From the Finder desktop, choose Go > Applications.
2 Double-click the Utilities folder.
3 Locate and double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
4 From the Printer List, choose Add.
5 Choose the Default Browser tab.
6 Click More Printers.
7 From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.
8 From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.
9 Select the printer from the list.
10 Click Add.

Installing the printer on a wired network

Use the following instructions to install the printer on a wired network. These instructions apply to Ethernet and fiber optic network connections.

Before you install the printer on a wired network, make sure that:

  • You have completed the initial setup of the printer.
  • The printer is connected to your network with the appropriate type of cable.

For Windows users

1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.

Wait for the Welcome screen to appear.

If the CD does not launch after a minute, then do the following:

a Click 📋, or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run box, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

2 Click Install Printer and Software.

3 Click Agree to agree to the License Agreement.
4 Select Suggested, and then click Next.

Note: To configure the printer using a static IP address, using IPv6, or to configure printers using scripts, select Custom and follow the on-screen instructions.

5 Select Wired Network Attach, and then click Next.
6 Select the printer manufacturer from the list.
7 Select the printer model from the list, and then click Next.
8 Select the printer from the list of printers discovered on the network, and then click Finish.

Note: If your configured printer does not appear in the list of discovered printers, click Add Port and follow the on-screen instructions.

9 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.

For Macintosh users

1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2 Print the network setup page from the printer. For information on printing a network setup page, see "Printing a network setup page" on page 34.
3 Locate the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section of the network setup page. You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
4 Install the drivers and add the printer.

a Install a PPD file on the computer:

1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive.
2 Double-click the installer package for the printer.
3 From the Welcome screen, click Continue.
4 Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file.
5 Click Continue after viewing the license agreement, and then click Agree to accept the terms of the agreement.
6 Select a Destination, and then click Continue.
7 From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
8 Type the user password, and then click OK. All the necessary software is installed on the computer.
9 Click Restart when installation is complete.

b Add the printer:

- For IP printing:

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later

1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.
3 Click +.
4 Click IP.
5 Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field.
6 Click Add.

In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier

1 From the Finder desktop, choose Go > Applications.
2 Double-click Utilities.
3 Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
4 From the Printer List, click Add.
5 Click IP.
6 Type in the IP address of your printer in the Address field.
7 Click Add.

- For AppleTalk printing:

In Mac OS X version 10.5

1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax.
3 Click +.
4 Click AppleTalk.
5 Select the printer from the list.
6 Click Add.

In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier

1 From the Finder desktop, choose Go > Applications.
2 Double-click Utilities.
3 Double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
4 From the Printer List, click Add.
5 Choose the Default Browser tab.
6 Click More Printers.
7 From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.
8 From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.
9 Select the printer from the list.
10 Click Add.

Note: If the printer doesn't show up in the list, you may need to add it using the IP address. Contact your system support person for assistance.

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact

Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:

•The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle

By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.

Saving paper and toner

Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.

For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see "Using Eco-Mode".

Using recycled paper and other office papers

As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for use in laser (electro-photographic) printers.

While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted with rigor and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including the following:

  • Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
    • Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
  • Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
  • Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer.
    •Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)
  • Surface roughness (measured in Sheffield units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
  • Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
  • Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves through the printer)
    •Brightness and texture (look and feel)

Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner, they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as colorants and "glue" often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However, using recycled papers enables better resource management overall.

Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products. To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor (up to 80%) of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This is due to the energy-intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper.

Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled paper is one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-equipped to help customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.

Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter's product list for special applications is maintained. However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing:

1 Minimize paper consumption.
2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry Stewardship Council (FSC) or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.
3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80g / m^2 certified paper, lower weight paper, or recycled paper.

Unacceptable paper examples

Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:

  • Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers
  • Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the paper
  • Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
  • Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm ( ± 0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.)
    •Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
  • Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
    •Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
    •Paper weighing less than 60 g/m ^2 (16 lb)
    •Multiple part forms or documents

For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can be found at the Environmental Sustainability link.

Conserving supplies

There are a number of ways you can reduce the amount of paper and toner you use when printing. You can:

Use both sides of the paper

If your printer model supports duplex printing, you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper for a printed document by selecting 2-sided printing from the Print dialog or the Lexmark Toolbar.

Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper

You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N-Up) section of the Print dialog screen.

Check your first draft for accuracy

Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:

  • Use the Lexmark preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or the Lexmark Toolbar to see what the document will look like before you print it.
  • Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.

Avoid paper jams

Carefully select and load paper to avoid paper jams. For more information, see "Avoiding jams" on page 114.

Saving energy

Using Eco-Mode

Use Eco-Mode to quickly select one or more ways to reduce your printer's environmental impact.

Note: See the table for the multiple settings that change when you select an Eco-Mode setting.

Choose To
Energy Reduceenergy use, especially when the printer is idle.Printer engine motors do not start until a job is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed.The printer enters Power Saver mode after one minute of inactivity.
Paper Duplexis enabled on printer models supporting duplex.
Energy/PaperUse all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode.
Off Use factorydefault settings for all settings associated with Eco-Mode. This setting supports the performance specifications for your printer.

To select an Eco-Mode setting:

1 From the printer control panel, press
2 Press the arrow buttons until Settings appears, and then press √.
3 Press the arrow buttons until General Settings appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Eco-Mode appears, and then press √.

5 Select the setting you want, and then press. √

Submitting changes appears.

Reducing printer noise

Use Quiet Mode to reduce the printer noise.

Note: See the table for the multiple settings that change when you select a Quiet Mode setting.

Choose To
On Reduce printer noise.You may notice a reduction in processing speed.Printer engine motors do not start until a job is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed.Fans run at a reduced speed or are turned off.If your printer has faxing capability, fax sounds are reduced or disabled, including those made by the fax speaker and ringer.
Off Use factory default settings. This setting supports theperformance specifications for your printer.

To select a Quiet Mode setting:

1 From the printer control panel, press .
2 Press the arrow buttons until Settings appears, and then press √.
3 Press the arrow buttons until General Settings appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Quiet Mode appears, and then press √.
5 Select the setting you want, and then press. √
Submitting changes appears.

Adjusting Power Saver

1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 From the printer control panel, press
3 Press the arrow buttons until Settings appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until General Settings appears, and then press √.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Timeout appears, and then press √.
6 Press the arrow buttons until Power Saver appears, and then press √.
7 Press the arrow buttons to enter the number of minutes for the printer to wait before entering the Power Saver mode. Available settings range from 1–240 minutes.

8 Press .√

Submitting changes appears.

9 Press, and then press until Ready appears.

Note: Power Saver settings can also be adjusted by typing the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Recycling

Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information, see:

•The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle

Recycling Lexmark products

To return Lexmark products to Lexmark for recycling:

1 Visit our Web site at www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Recycling Lexmark packaging

Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.

Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.

The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.

When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the box.

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling

The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.

To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the pre-paid shipping label. You can also:

1 Visit our Web site at www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Loading paper and specialty media

This section explains how to use the 250-sheet tray, the manual feeder, an optional 550-sheet tray, and the 650-sheet duo drawer with an integrated multipurpose feeder. It also includes information about paper orientation, setting the Paper Size and Paper Type, and linking and unlinking trays.

Linking and unlinking trays

Linking trays

Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds from the next linked tray. When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are automatically linked. The Paper Size setting for all trays must be set manually from the Paper Size menu. The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu. The Paper Type menu and the Paper Size menu are both available from the Paper Size/Type menu.

Unlinking trays

Unlinked trays have settings that are not the same as the settings of any other tray.

To unlink a tray, change the following tray settings so that they do not match the settings of any other tray:

- Paper Type (for example: Plain Paper, Letterhead, Custom Type )

Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics. If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked trays, assign a different Paper Type name to the tray, such as Custom Type , or define your own custom name.

•Paper Size (for example: letter, A4, statement)

Load a different paper size to change the Paper Size setting for a tray. Paper Size settings are not automatic; they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper loaded in the tray. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type. Paper may not be properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected.

Assigning a Custom Type name

Assign a Custom Type name to a tray to link or unlink it. Associate the same Custom Type name to each tray that you want to link. Only trays with the same custom names assigned will link.

1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.

2 From the printer control panel, press .

3 Press the arrow buttons until Paper Menu appears, and then press √.

4 Press the arrow buttons until Size/Type appears, and then press √.

5 Press the arrow buttons, and then press √ to select the tray.

The Paper Size menu appears.

6 Press the arrow buttons until the Paper Type menu appears.

7 Press √.

8 Press the arrow buttons until Custom Type or another custom name appears, and then press √.

Submitting changes appears, followed by Paper Menu.

9 Press, and then press to return to the Ready state.

Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type

Note: Trays with matching Paper Size and Paper Type settings are automatically linked by the printer. When a linked tray runs out of paper, the printer draws from another tray.

To change the Paper Size and Paper Type settings:

1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 From the printer control panel, press .
3 Press the arrow buttons until Paper Menu appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Size/Type appears, and then press √.
5 Press the arrow buttons until the correct tray appears, and then press √.
6 Press when Size appears.
7 Press the arrow buttons until the correct size appears, and then press . √ Submitting changes appears, followed by Size.
8 Press the arrow buttons until Type appears, and then press .
9 Press the arrow buttons until the correct type appears, and then press √. Submitting changes appears, followed by Type.

10 Press, and then press to return to the Ready state.

Configuring Universal paper settings

The Universal Paper Size is a user-defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:

• Units of measure (inches or millimeters)
•Portrait Height and Portrait Width
- Feed Direction

Note: The smallest supported Universal size is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.); the largest is 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).

Specify a unit of measurement

1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 From the printer control panel, press
3 Press the arrow buttons until Paper Menu appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Universal Setup appears, and then press √.

5 Press the arrow buttons until Units of Measure appears, and then press √.

6 Press the arrow buttons until the correct unit of measure appears, and then press.

Submitting changes appears, followed by the Universal Setup menu.

Specify the paper height and width

Defining a specific height and width measurement for the Universal paper size (in the portrait orientation) allows the printer to support the size, including support for standard features such as duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet.

1 From the Universal Setup menu, press the arrow buttons until Portrait Width or Portrait Height appears, and then press √.

Note: Select Portrait Height to adjust the paper height setting or Paper Width to adjust the paper width setting.

2 Press the arrow buttons to decrease or to increase the setting, and then press.

Submitting changes appears, followed by the Universal Setup menu.

Loading the standard 250-sheet tray and optional 550-sheet tray

The printer has one standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1) with an attached manual feeder. The 250-sheet tray, the 650-sheet duo drawer, and the optional 550-sheet tray support the same paper sizes and types and are loaded in the same way.

Note: The optional 550-sheet tray is not available for all printer models.

1 Pull the tray out.

Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.

LEXMARK X544dn - Loading the standard 250-sheet tray and optional 550-sheet tray - 1

natural_image Illustration of a printer with internal circuitry and a red arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols present)

2 Squeeze the length guide tab inward as shown, and slide the guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded.

LEXMARK X544dn - Loading the standard 250-sheet tray and optional 550-sheet tray - 2

natural_image 3D diagram of a computer motherboard showing internal components and a magnified view of the internal structure (no text or symbols)

Note: Use the size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guide.

3 If the paper is longer than letter-size paper, then push the green tab at the back of the tray to elongate it.

LEXMARK X544dn - Loading the standard 250-sheet tray and optional 550-sheet tray - 3

natural_image Diagram of a computer motherboard showing internal components and highlighted areas with red arrows (no text or symbols)

4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

LEXMARK X544dn - Loading the standard 250-sheet tray and optional 550-sheet tray - 4

natural_image Three-step illustration showing hands folding a flexible object into a curved surface, with red arrows indicating direction of movement (no text or symbols)

5 Load the paper stack with the recommended print side faceup.

LEXMARK X544dn - Loading the standard 250-sheet tray and optional 550-sheet tray - 5

natural_image 3D diagram of a device with an open lid and internal compartments, showing a red arrow indicating a process or operation (no text or symbols present)

6 Make sure the paper guides are secure against the edges of the paper.

Note: Make sure that the side guides are placed tightly against the edges of the paper so that the image is registered properly on the page.

7 Insert the tray.

LEXMARK X544dn - Loading the standard 250-sheet tray and optional 550-sheet tray - 6

natural_image Illustration of a printer with a paper feed being inserted, showing internal components and a red arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols present)

8 If a different type or size of paper was loaded than the type or size previously loaded in the tray, change the Paper Type or Paper Size setting for the tray from the printer control panel.

Note: Mixing paper sizes or types in a paper tray may lead to jams.

Loading the 650-sheet duo drawer

The 650-sheet duo drawer (Tray 2) consists of a 550-sheet tray and an integrated 100-sheet multipurpose feeder. The drawer is loaded in the same way as the 250-sheet tray and the optional 550-sheet tray, and supports the same paper types and sizes. The only differences are the look of the guide tabs and the location of the paper size indicators, as shown in the following illustration:

Note: The optional 550-sheet tray is not available for all printer models.

LEXMARK X544dn - Loading the 650-sheet duo drawer - 1

natural_image 3D cutaway diagram of a mechanical device showing internal components and housing (no text or symbols)
1Length guide tabs
2Size indicators
3Width guide tabs

Using the multipurpose feeder

1 Push the multipurpose feeder latch to the left.

LEXMARK X544dn - Using the multipurpose feeder - 1

natural_image 3D diagram of a printer interior with a highlighted circular component and arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

2 Open the multipurpose feeder.

LEXMARK X544dn - Using the multipurpose feeder - 2

natural_image Diagram of a printer internal structure showing internal components and a red arrow indicating a loading or movement (no text or symbols present)

3 Grasp the extension, and pull it straight out until it is fully extended.

LEXMARK X544dn - Using the multipurpose feeder - 3

natural_image Diagram of a printer's internal structure showing paper feed and printer tray (no text or symbols)

4 Prepare the paper for loading.

- Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

LEXMARK X544dn - Using the multipurpose feeder - 4

natural_image Three-step illustration showing hands holding a folded paper or sheet, with red arrows indicating fold changes (no text or symbols present)

- Hold transparencies by the edges and fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

Note: Avoid touching the print side of transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.

LEXMARK X544dn - Using the multipurpose feeder - 5

natural_image Three-step illustration showing hands holding a flexible sheet, folding a flat panel, and holding a curved paper with bidirectional arrows (no text or symbols)

- Flex a stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.

5 Locate the stack height limiter and tab.

Note: Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper under the stack height limiter.

LEXMARK X544dn - Using the multipurpose feeder - 6

text_image Technical diagram of a printer internal structure with numbered components
1Tab
2Stack height limiter
3Width guide
4Size indicators

6 Load the paper, and then adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack.

- Load paper, card stock, and transparencies with the recommended print side facedown and the top edge entering first.

LEXMARK X544dn - Using the multipurpose feeder - 7

natural_image Illustration of a printer printing process with a red arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

- Load envelopes with the flap side up.

Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer..

Notes:

- Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.

- Load only one size and type of paper at a time.

7 Make sure the paper is as far into the multipurpose feeder as it will go with very gentle pushing. Paper should lie flat in the multipurpose feeder. Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder and is not bent or wrinkled.

8 From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type.

Using the manual feeder

The standard 250-sheet tray has an integrated manual feeder that can be used to print on different types of media one sheet at a time.

1 Send a manual print job:

For Windows users

a With a document open, click File → Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Click the Paper tab.
d From the Paper type menu, select Manual paper.
e From the Paper size menu, select the appropriate media size.
f Click OK.
g Click OK again.

For Macintosh users

a With a document open, click File > Print.
b From the Copies & Pages or General pop-up menu, choose Manual Paper.
c Click OK or Print.

2 When Load Single Sheet Feeder with appears, load the print media facedown into the manual feeder. Load envelopes with the flap side up.

LEXMARK X544dn - For Macintosh users - 1

natural_image Illustration of a printer with paper being inserted, showing paper sheet and printer cover (no text or symbols)

Note: Align the long edge of the print media so that it is flush with the right side of the manual feeder.

Loading paper and specialty media

3 Adjust the width guides until they lightly touch the media sheet. Do not force the width guides against the media, or it could be damaged.

LEXMARK X544dn - For Macintosh users - 2

natural_image Illustration of a printer with paper being inserted, showing paper movement and red arrows indicating process (no text or symbols)

4 Push the media in until it stops. The printer pulls it in farther.

Note: To achieve the best possible print quality, use only high-quality media designed for laser printers.

Paper and specialty media guide

Additional information for printing on speciality medias may be found in the Cardstock and Label Guide available on Lexmark.com/publications.

Paper guidelines

Paper characteristics

The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock.

Weight

The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 176 g/m ^2 (16 to 47 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than 75 g/m ^2 (20 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 80 g/m ^2 (21 lb bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m ^2 or heavier paper.

Curl

Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems.

Smoothness

Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points; however, smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.

Moisture content

The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly. Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.

Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.

Grain direction

Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.

For 60 to 176 g/m ^2 (16 to 47 lb bond) paper, use grain long fibers.

Fiber content

Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton possesses characteristics that can negatively affect paper handling.

Unacceptable paper

The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:

  • Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
  • Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
  • Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
  • Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm ( ± 0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
    In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.

•Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
- Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
•Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
•Paper weighing less than 60 g/m ^2 (16 lb)
•Multiple-part forms or documents

Selecting paper

Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble-free printing.

To help avoid jams and poor print quality:

•Always use new, undamaged paper.
- Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.
- Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
- Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same source; mixing results in jams.
- Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead

Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:

  • Use grain long for 60 to 176g / m^2 weight paper.
  • Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
  • Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.

Use papers printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 200^ C ( 392^ F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not. When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.

Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 200^ C ( 392^ F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.

Storing paper

Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:

  • For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24°C (65 to 75°F) with relative humidity between 40 and 60%.
  • Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
    •Store individual packages on a flat surface.
  • Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights

The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the types of paper they support.

Note: For an unlisted paper size, select the closest larger listed size.

Paper sizes supported by the printer

Notes:

  • Your printer model may have a 650-sheet duo drawer, which consists of a 550-sheet tray and an integrated 100-sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550-sheet tray part of the 650-sheet duo drawer supports the same paper as the optional 550-sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and weights.
  • The optional 550-sheet tray is not available for all printer models.
Paper size Dimensions 250-sheet tray Optional550-sheet trayMultipurpose feederManual feeder
A4210 x 297 mm(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
A5148 x 210 mm(5.83 x 8.3 in.)
JIS B5182 x 257 mm(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
A6105 x 148 mm(4.1 x 5.8 in.)XX
Statement140 x 216 mm(5.5 x 8.5 in.)XX
Letter216 x 279 mm(8.5 x 11 in.)
Folio216 x 330 mm(8.5 x 13 in.)
Oficio (Mexico)216 x 340 mm(8.5 x 13 in.)
*When Universal is selected, the page is formatted for 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software program.
Legal216 x 356 mm(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive184 x 267 mm(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
Universal*148 x 210 mm(5.8 x 8.3 in.) up to 216 x 356 mm(8.5 x 14 in.)
76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.)up to 216 x 356 mm(8.5 x 14 in.)XX
7 3/4 Envelope(Monarch)98 x 191 mm(3.9 x 7.5 in.)XX
9 Envelope98 x 225 mm(3.9 x 8.9 in.)XX
10 Envelope105 x 241 mm(4.1 x 9.5 in.)XX
DL Envelope110 x 220 mm(4.3 x 8.7 in.)XX
B5 Envelope176 x 250 mm(6.9 x 9.8 in.)XX
C5 Envelope162 x 229 mm(6.4 x 9 in.)XX
Monarch105 x 241 mm(4.1 x 9.5 in.)XX
Other Envelope98 x 162 mm(3.9 x 6.3 in.) up to 176 x 250 mm(6.9 x 9.8 in.)XX
*When Universal is selected, the page is formatted for 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software program.

Paper types supported by the printer

Notes:

- Your printer model may have a 650-sheet duo drawer, which consists of a 550-sheet tray and an integrated 100-sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550-sheet tray part of the 650-sheet duo drawer supports the same paper as the optional 550-sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and weights.

- The optional 550-sheet tray is not available for all printer models.

Paper type Standard 250-sheet trayOptional 550-sheet trayMultipurpose feederManual feeder
Paper
Card stock
Transparencies* X
Envelopes X X
Paper labels
* Lexmark transparency part numbers 12A8240 and 12A8241 are supported from the standard tray, manual feeder, and the multipurpose feeder.

Paper types and weights supported by the printer

Notes:

  • Your printer model may have a 650-sheet duo drawer, which consists of a 550-sheet tray and an integrated 100-sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550-sheet tray part of the 650-sheet duo drawer supports the same paper as the optional 550-sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and weights.
  • The optional 550-sheet tray is not available for all printer models.
Paper type 250-sheet tray Optional 550-sheettrayTrayMultipurpose feederManual feeder
Light1,260 to 74.9 g/m2 grain long (16 to 19.9 lb bond)60 to 74.9 g/m2 grain long (16 to 19.9 lb bond)60 to 74.9 g/m2 grain long (16 to 19.9 lb bond)60 to 74.9 g/m2 grain long (16 to 19.9 lb bond)
Plain1,275 to 89.9 g/m2 grain long (20 to 23.8 lb bond)75 to 89.9 g/m2 grain long (20 to 23.8 lb bond)75 to 89.9 g/m2 grain long (20 to 23.8 lb bond)75 to 89.9 g/m2 grain long (20 to 23.8 lb bond)
Heavy1,290 to 104.9 g/m2 grain long (23.9 to 27.8 lb bond)90 to 104.9 g/m2 grain long (23.9 to 27.8 lb bond)90 to 104.9 g/m2 grain long (23.9 to 27.8 lb bond)90 to 104.9 g/m2 grain long (23.9 to 27.8 lb bond)
Cardstock1,2105 to 176 g/m2 grain long (27.8 to 47 lb bond)105 to 176 g/m2 grain long (27.8 to 47 lb bond)105 to 176 g/m2 grain long (27.8 to 47 lb bond)105 to 176 g/m2 grain long (27.8 to 47 lb bond)
1 Paper types must be set to match the supporting paper weights.2 The duplex supports paper weights between 60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb) grain long bond. The duplex does not support card stock, transparencies, envelopes, or labels.3 For 60 to 176 g/m2 (16 to 47 lb bond) paper, we recommend grain long fibers.4 Lexmark transparency part numbers 12A8240 and 12A8241 are supported from the 250-sheet tray, manual feeder, and multipurpose feeder.5 The pressure sensitive area must enter the printer first.6 100 percent cotton content maximum weight is 90 g/m2 (24 lb) bond.7 105 g/m2 (28 lb) bond envelopes are limited to 25 percent cotton content.
Paper type 250-sheet tray Optional 550-sheettraytrayMultipurpose feederManual feeder
Glossy papers Book—8 to176 g/m2 grain long(60 to 120 lb book)Cover—162 to176 g/m2 grain long(60 to 65 lb cover)Book—88 to176 g/m2 grain long(60 to 120 lb book)Cover—162 to176 g/m2 grain long(60 to 65 lb cover)Book—88 to176 g/m2 grain long(60 to 120 lb book)Cover—162 to176 g/m2 grain long(60 to 65 lb cover)Book—88to176 g/m2 grain long(60 to 120 lb book)Cover—162 to176 g/m2 grain long(60 to 65 lb cover)Book—88 to176 g/m2 grain long(60 to 120 lb book)Cover—162 to176 g/m2 grain long(60 to 65 lb cover)
Card stock—maximum (grain long) ^3 Index Bristol—120 g/m2 (67 lb)Tag—120 g/m2 (74 lb)Cover—135 g/m2(50 lb)Index Bristol—120 g/m2 (67 lb)Tag—120 g/m2 (74 lb)Cover—135 g/m2(50 lb)Index Bristol—120 g/m2 (67 lb)Tag—120 g/m2 (74 lb)Cover—135 g/m2(50 lb)Index Bristol—120 g/m2 (67 lb)Tag —120 g/m2 (74 lb)Cover—135 g/m2(50 lb)
Card stock—maximum (grain short) ^1 Index Bristol—163 g/m2 (90 lb)Tag—163 g/m2(100 lb)Cover—176 g/m2(65 lb)Index Bristol—163 g/m2 (90 lb)Tag—163 g/m2(100 lb)Cover—176 g/m2(65 lb)Index Bristol—163 g/m2 (90 lb)Tag—163 g/m2(100 lb)Cover—176 g/m2(65 lb)Index Bristol—163 g/m2 (90 lb Tag—163 g/m2(100 lb)Cover—176 g/m2(65 lb)
Transparencies ^4 170–180 g/m2 (45 to 48 lb)N/A170–180 g/m2 (45 to 48 lb)170–180 g/m2 (45 to 48 lb)
Labels—maximum ^5 Paper—131 g/m2(35 lb bond)Paper—131 g/m2(35 lb bond)Paper—131 g/m2(35 lb bond)Paper—131 g/m2(35 lb bond)
Envelopes ^6,7 XX60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb bond)60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb bond)
^1 Paper types must be set to match the supporting paper weights. ^2 The duplex supports paper weights between 60–105 g/m2 (16–28 lb) grain long bond. The duplex does not support card stock, transparencies, envelopes, or labels. ^3 For 60 to 176 g/m2 (16 to 47 lb bond) paper, we recommend grain long fibers. ^4 Lexmark transparency part numbers 12A8240 and 12A8241 are supported from the 250-sheet tray, manual feeder, and multipurpose feeder. ^5 The pressure sensitive area must enter the printer first. ^6 100 percent cotton content maximum weight is 90 g/m2 (24 lb) bond. ^7 105 g/m2 (28 lb) bond envelopes are limited to 25 percent cotton content.

Paper capacities

Input capacities

Notes:

  • Your printer model may have a 650-sheet duo drawer, which consists of a 550-sheet tray and an integrated 100-sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550-sheet tray part of the 650-sheet duo drawer supports the same paper as the optional 550-sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and weights.
  • The optional 550-sheet tray is not available for all printer models.
Paper type 250-sheet tray Optional 550-sheet tray Multipurpose tray
Paper 250 sheets^1 550 sheets^1 100 sheets^1
Labels 100^2 200^2 50^2
Transparencies50X50
Envelopes X X10
Other X XVarious quantities^3
^1 Based on 75 g/m ^2 (20 lb) paper ^2 Capacity varies depending on label material and construction. ^3 Capacity varies depending on the weight and type of paper.

Output capacity

Paper typeStandard output bin1
Paper100 sheets2
1 Capacity may vary depending on media specifications and the printer operating environment.2 Based on 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper

Printing

This chapter covers printing, printer reports, and job cancellation. Selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information, see "Avoiding jams" and "Storing print media."

Printing a document

1 Load paper into a tray or feeder.
2 From the printer control panel Paper menu, set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper.
3 Do one of the following:

For Windows users

a With a document open, click File → Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup, and then adjust the settings as needed.

Note: To print on a specific size or type of paper, adjust the paper size or type settings to match the loaded paper, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.

c Click OK, and then click Print.

For Macintosh users

a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog:

1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper.
3 Click OK.

b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog:

1 With a document open, choose File > Print.

If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2 From the Print dialog and pop-up menus, adjust the settings as needed.

Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.

3 Click Print.

Warning—Potential Damage: While printing, do not touch the metal shaft in the area where the printer ejects paper into the standard exit bin.

Printing on specialty media

Tips on using letterhead

Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. Use the following table to determine which direction to load the letterhead:

Source or process Print side and paper orientation
•Standard 250-sheet tray•Optional 550-sheet tray•Simplex (one-sided) printing from traysPrinted letterhead design is placed faceup. The top edge of the sheet with the logo is placed at the front of the tray.LEXMARK X544dn - Tips on using letterhead - 1
Duplex (two-sided) printing from traysPrinted letterhead design is placed facedown. The top edge of the sheet with the logo is placed at the back of the tray.LEXMARK X544dn - Tips on using letterhead - 2
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser printers.
Manual feeder (simplex printing) Multipurpose feederPreprinted letterhead design is placed facedown. The top edge of the sheet with the logo should enter the manual feeder first.LEXMARK X544dn - Tips on using letterhead - 3
Manual feeder (duplex printing) Multipurpose feederPreprinted letterhead design is placed faceup. The top edge of the sheet with the logo should enter the manual feeder last.LEXMARK X544dn - Tips on using letterhead - 4
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser printers.

Tips on using transparencies

Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.

When printing on transparencies:

  • Feed transparencies from the 250-sheet tray, manual feeder, or optional multipurpose feeder.
  • Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 200°C (392°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.
    •To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.
  • Before loading transparencies, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
  • We recommend Lexmark part number 12A8240 for letter-size transparencies and Lexmark part number 12A8241 for A4-size transparencies.

Tips on using envelopes

Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.

When printing on envelopes:

- Feed envelopes from the manual feeder or optional multipurpose feeder.

- Set the Paper Type to Envelope, and select the envelope size.

- Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 200°C (392°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or releasing hazardous emissions.

- For the best performance, use envelopes made from 60g / m^2 (16 lb bond) paper. Use up to 105g / m^2 (28 lb bond) weight for envelopes as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. All-cotton envelopes must not exceed 90g / m^2 (24 lb bond) weight.

- Use only new envelopes.

- To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:

—Have excessive curl or twist

—Are stuck together or damaged in any way

—Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing

—Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars

—Have an interlocking design

—Have postage stamps attached

—Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position

—Have bent corners

—Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes

- Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.

Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.

Tips on using paper labels

Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.

Note: Use only paper label sheets.

When printing on labels:

  • From MarkVision Professional, the printer software, or the printer control panel, set the Paper Type to Labels.
  • Use only letter-, A4-, or legal-size label sheets.
  • Use labels designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:

  • The labels can withstand temperatures up to 200^ (392°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.

  • Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure without delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.

- Do not use labels with slick backing material.

  • Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.
  • Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
  • Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.
  • Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.) away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.

- If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, remove a 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) strip on the leading and driver edge, and use a non-oozing adhesive.

- Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.

Tips on using card stock

Card stock is heavy, single-ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness, and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.

When printing on card stock:

- From MarkVision Professional, the printer software, or the printer control panel:

1 Set the Paper Type to Card Stock.
2 Set the Paper Weight to Card Stock Weight.
3 Set the Card Stock Weight to Normal or Heavy.

  • Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper handling problems.
  • Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 200°C (392°F) without releasing hazardous emissions.
  • Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting introduces semi-liquid and volatile components into the printer.
  • Use grain short card stock when possible.

Printing from a flash drive

A USB port is located on the printer control panel. Insert a flash drive to print supported file types.

Notes:

  • When a USB flash drive is inserted into the printer, the printer can only scan to the flash drive or print files from the flash drive. All other printer functions are unavailable.
  • Before printing an encrypted .pdf file, enter the file password from the printer control panel.
  • You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.

To print from a flash drive:

1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready or Busy appears.
2 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.

LEXMARK X544dn - Notes: - 1

natural_image Illustration of a printer's internal control panel with a red arrow pointing to the button (no text or symbols visible)

Notes:

  • If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, the printer ignores the flash drive.
  • If you insert the flash drive while the printer is printing other jobs, Busy appears. After the other jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.

3 Press the arrow button until the document you want to print appears, and then press.

Note: Folders found on the flash drive appear with a + in front of the folder (for example, + documents). File names are appended by the extension type (for example, .jpg).

4 Press √ to print one copy, or enter the number of copies using the keypad, and then press √ to initiate the print job.

Note: Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.

Supported flash drives and file types

Flash drive File type
Lexar JumpDrive 2.0Pro (256 MB, 512 MB, or 1G sizes) orSanDisk Cruzer Mini (256 MB, 512 MB, or 1G sizes);Notes:Hi-Speed USB flash drives must support the Full-speed standard. Devices supporting only USB Low-speed capabilities are not supported.USB flash drives must support the FAT (File Allocation Tables) system. Devices formatted with NTFS (New Technology File System) or any other file system are not supported.Documents:pdfpcxxps.dcxImages:gifJPEGbmp.TIFF.png

Printing photos from a PictBridge-enabled digital camera

You can connect a PictBridge-enabled digital camera to the printer, and use the buttons on the camera to select and print photos.

1 Insert one end of the USB cable into the camera.

Note: Use only the USB cable that came with your camera.

2 Insert the other end of the USB cable into the USB port on the front of the printer.

LEXMARK X544dn - Printing photos from a PictBridge-enabled digital camera - 1

natural_image Illustration of a printer with a camera attached to its side panel, showing no text or symbols on the device itself.

Notes:

  • Make sure the PictBridge-enabled digital camera is set to the correct USB mode. See the camera documentation for more information.
  • If the PictBridge connection is successful, then a confirmation message appears on the printer display.

3 Follow the instructions on the camera to select and print photos.

Note: If the printer is turned off while the camera is connected, then you must disconnect and then reconnect the camera.

Printing information pages

For more information on printing these pages, see "Printing menu settings pages" on page 34 and "Printing a network setup page" on page 34.

Printing a font sample list

To print samples of the fonts currently available for your printer:

1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 From the printer control panel, press .
3 Press the arrow buttons until Reports appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Print Fonts appears, and then press √.
5 Press the arrow buttons until PCL Fonts, PostScript Fonts, or PPDS Fonts appears, and then press √.
After the font sample list prints, Ready appears.

Printing a directory list

A directory list shows the resources stored in flash memory or on the hard disk.

1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 From the printer control panel, press .
3 Press the arrow buttons until Reports appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Print Directory appears, and then press √. After the directory list prints, Ready appears.

Printing the print quality test pages

Print the print quality test pages to isolate print quality problems.

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Hold down √ and the right arrow button while turning the printer on.
3 Release the buttons when the dots appear, and wait for CONFIG MENU to appear.
4 Press the arrow buttons until PRINT_QUAL_TXT appears, and then press √. The print quality test pages print.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Exit Config Menu appears, and then press √. Resetting the Printer appears briefly, and then Ready appears.

Canceling a print job

Canceling a print job from the printer control panel

1 Press

LEXMARK X544dn - Canceling a print job from the printer control panel - 1

Stopping . . . appears, followed by Cancel Print Job.

2 Press

LEXMARK X544dn - Canceling a print job from the printer control panel - 2

Canceling appears.

Canceling a print job from the computer

To cancel a print job, do one of the following:

For Windows users

1 Click 📄, or click Start and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run box, type control printers.
3 Press Enter, or click OK.

The printer folder opens.

4 Double-click the printer icon.
5 Select the job to cancel.
6 From the keyboard, press Delete.

From the Windows taskbar:

When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the right corner of the taskbar.

1 Double-click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
2 Select a job to cancel.
3 From the keyboard, press Delete.

For Macintosh users

In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later:

1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.
2 Click Print & Fax, and then double-click the printer icon.
3 From the printer window, select the job to cancel.
4 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.

In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier:

1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.
2 Double-click Utilities, and then double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.

3 Double-click the printer icon.
4 From the printer window, select the job to cancel.
5 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.

Copying

ADF Scanner glass

LEXMARK X544dn - ADF Scanner glass - 1

natural_image Illustration of a printer with paper and a red arrow indicating print direction (no text or symbols)

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.

LEXMARK X544dn - ADF Scanner glass - 2

natural_image Illustration of an open printer with a red arrow pointing to the lid area, showing paper sheet layout (no text or symbols)

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Making copies

Making a quick copy

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press for a black only copy or for a color copy.

Note: If a Lexmark™ Document Solutions Suite (LDSS) profile has been installed, then you may receive an error when attempting a quick copy. Contact your system support person for access.

4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.

Copying using the ADF

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 Adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.

4 Change the copy settings as needed.
5 From the printer control panel, press for a black only copy or for a color copy.

Copying using the scanner glass

1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
3 Change the copy settings as needed.
4 From the printer control panel, press for a black only copy or for a color copy.
5 Place the next document on the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.

Copying photos

1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.
3 Press the Content button until the light next to Photo comes on.
4 Change the copy settings as needed.
5 From the printer control panel, press for a black only copy or for a color copy.
6 Place the next document on the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.

Copying on specialty media

Copying to transparencies

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.
4 From the Copy area, press the Options button.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Paper Source appears, and then press √.
6 Press the arrow buttons until the tray or source containing the transparencies appears, and then press √.
7 Change the copy settings as needed.
8 Press for a black only copy or for a color copy.
9 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.

Copying to letterhead

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.
4 From the Copy area, press the Options button.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Paper Source appears, and then press √.
6 Press the arrow buttons until the tray or source containing the letterhead appears, and then press √.
7 Change the copy settings as needed.
8 Press for a black only copy or for a color copy.
9 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.

Customizing copy settings

Copying from one size to another

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.
4 From the Copy area, press the Options button.

Original Size appears.

5 Press .√

6 Press the arrow buttons until the size of the original document appears, and then press √.
7 Press the arrow buttons until Paper Source appears, and then press √.
8 Press the arrow buttons until the tray or source containing the size you want the copy to be appears, and then press √

Note: If you select a paper size that is different from the original size, then the printer will scale the size automatically.

9 Change the copy settings as needed.

10 Press for a black only copy or for a color copy.

11 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.

12 Press to return to the Ready state.

Making copies using paper from a selected tray

During the copy process, you can select the tray that contains the paper type of choice. For example, if specialty media is loaded in the multipurpose feeder, and you want to make copies on that media:

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.

4 From the Copy area, press the Options button.

5 Press the arrow buttons until Paper Source appears, and then press √.

6 Press the arrow buttons until the tray or source containing the media you want the copy to be on appears, and then press √

7 Change the copy settings as needed.

8 Press for a black only copy or for a color copy.

9 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.

10 Press to return to the Ready state.

Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)

Note: The duplex feature is not available on selected printer models.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.

4 Press the Duplex/2-Sided button.

5 Press the arrow buttons until 1 To 2 Sided appears, and then press √.

The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select 1-sided to 2-sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2-sided copies.

6 Press ◆ for a black only copy or for a color copy.

7 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.

Reducing or enlarging copies

Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, then the content of your original document will be scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.

To reduce or enlarge a copy:

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.
4 Press the Scale button.
5 Press the arrow buttons until the scale option you want appears, and then press.

If you selected Custom then do the following:

a Press the arrow buttons to decrease or increase the size, or enter a number between 25 and 400 on the numeric keypad.

b Press √.

6 Press for a black only copy or for a color copy.

7 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.

Making a copy lighter or darker

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.
4 Press the Darkness button.
5 Press the arrow buttons to make the copy lighter or darker.
6 Press .√
7 Press for a black only copy or for a color copy.
8 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.

Adjusting copy quality

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.

4 Press the Content button until the light comes on next to the setting that best represents what you are copying:

  • Text—Used for original documents that are mostly text or line art
  • Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
  • Photo—Used when the original document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print

5 Press for a black only copy or for a color copy.

6 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.

7 Press to return to the Ready state.

Collating copies

If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the copies as groups of pages (not collated).

Collated Not collated

LEXMARK X544dn - Collated Not collated - 1

LEXMARK X544dn - Collated Not collated - 2

By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off.

To turn collation off:

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.

4 From the Copy area, press the Options button.

5 Press the arrow buttons until Collate appears, and then press √.

6 Press the arrow buttons until Off [1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2] appears, and then press √.

7 Press ◆ for a black only copy or for a color copy.

8 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.

Placing separator sheets between copies

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Settings.

3 Click Copy Settings.

4 Click Separator Sheets.

Note: Collation must be On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies. If Collation is Off, then the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job.

5 Select one of the following:

  • Between pages
  • Between copies
  • Between jobs

6 Click Submit.

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet

In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto a single sheet of paper.

Notes:

•The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or B5 JIS.
•The Copy Size must be set to 100%.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press the Copy button.

4 From the Copy area, press the Options button.

5 Press the arrow buttons until Paper Saver appears, and then press √.

6 Select the output you want.

For example, if you have four portrait-oriented original documents that you want copied to the same side of one sheet, stop at 4 on 1 Portrait, and then press √

7 Press for a black only copy or for a color copy.

8 If you placed the document on the scanner glass and have additional pages to copy, then place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press 1 on the numeric keypad. Otherwise, press 2 on the numeric keypad.

Canceling a copy job

A copy job can be canceled when the document is in the ADF, on the scanner glass, or while the document is printing. To cancel a copy job:

1 From the printer control, panel press .

Stopping appears, followed by Cancel Job.

2 Press to cancel the job.

Note: If you want to continue to process the job, then press to continue copying.

Canceling appears.

The printer clears all pages in the ADF or printer and then cancels the job. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.

Improving copy quality

Question Tip
When should I use Text mode?•Use text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the copy, and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.•Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that contain only text or fine line art.
When should I use Text/Photo mode?•Use Text/Photo mode when copying an original document that contains a mixture of text and graphics.•Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and brochures.
When should I use Photograph mode?Use Photograph mode when the original document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print.

E-mailing

ADF Scanner glass

LEXMARK X544dn - ADF Scanner glass - 1

natural_image Illustration of a printer with paper and a red arrow indicating print direction (no text or symbols)

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.

LEXMARK X544dn - ADF Scanner glass - 2

natural_image Illustration of an open printer with a red arrow indicating the paper cut (no text or symbols present)

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

You can use the printer to e-mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e-mail from the printer. You can type the e-mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.

Getting ready to e-mail

Setting up the e-mail function

For e-mail to operate, it must be turned on in the printer settings and have a valid IP address or gateway address. To set up the e-mail function:

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Settings.
3 Click E-mail/FTP Settings.
4 Click E-mail Server Setup.
5 Change the e-mail settings as needed.
6 Click Submit.

Setting up the address book

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click E-mail/FTP Settings.
4 Click Manage E-mail Shortcuts.
5 Change the e-mail settings as needed.
6 Click Submit.

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Settings.

3 Click Manage Destinations.

Note: You may be asked to enter a password. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support person.

4 Click E-mail Destination Setup.

5 Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.

Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, separate each address with a comma (,).

6 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).

7 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.

If you enter a number that is already in use, you are prompted to select another number.

E-mailing a document

Sending an e-mail using the keypad

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press the Scan/Email button.

Scan to E-mail appears.

4 Press

LEXMARK X544dn - Sending an e-mail using the keypad - 1

Search or Manual Entry appears.

Note: If there are no entries in the address book, then Manual Entry appears.

5 Press √ to search the address book or press the arrow buttons until Manual appears, and then press √ to select or enter an e-mail address.

Using the address book

a After selecting Search on the printer control panel, press the arrow buttons until the address you want appears, and then press √
b Press 1 to search for another address or press 2 to end the search.
After you press 2, Press Start To Begin appears.

c Press to send a black only copy or to send a color copy.

Manually entering an e-mail address

After selecting Manual on the printer control panel, Entry Name appears on the first line and a blank line with a blinking cursor appears on the second line.

a Press the button on the numeric keypad that corresponds with the number or letter you want. The first time you press the button, the number for that button appears. When you press the button again, one of the letters assigned to that button appears.
b Press the right arrow button to move to the next space, or wait a few seconds and the cursor will move to the next space.

c Once the e-mail address is entered, press √.

Another E-mail? 1=Yes 2=NO appears.

d Press 1 to enter another address, or press 2 to end the address entry.
After you press 2, Press Start To Begin appears.

e Press ◆ to send a black only copy or to send a color copy.

Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press the Scan/Email button.

Scan to E-mail appears.

4 Press

LEXMARK X544dn - Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number - 1

Search appears.

Note: If there are no entries in the address book, Manual Entry appears.

5 Press, and then enter the recipient's shortcut number.

6 Press 1 to enter another shortcut or press 2 to end the shortcut entry.

After you press 2, Press Start To Begin appears.

7 Press to send a black only e-mail or to send a color e-mail.

Sending an e-mail using the address book

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press the Scan/Email button.

Scan to E-mail appears.

4 Press √.

Search appears.

Note: If there are no entries in the address book, Manual Entry appears.

5 Press to search the address book.

6 Press the arrow buttons until the address you want appears, and then press √

7 Press 1 to search for another address or press 2 to end the search.

After you press 2, Press Start To Begin appears.

8 Press to send a black only copy or to send a color copy.

Canceling an e-mail

An e-mail can be canceled when the document is in the ADF or on the scanner glass. To cancel an e-mail:

1 From the printer control panel, press .

Stopping appears, and then Cancel Job appears.

2 Press to cancel the job.

Note: If you want to continue to process the job, press to continue scanning the e-mail.

Canceling appears.

The printer clears all pages in the ADF and then cancels the job. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.

Faxing

ADF Scanner glass

LEXMARK X544dn - ADF Scanner glass - 1

natural_image Illustration of a printer with paper and a red arrow indicating print direction (no text or symbols)

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.

LEXMARK X544dn - ADF Scanner glass - 2

natural_image Illustration of an open printer with a red arrow pointing to the lid area, showing paper sheet layout (no text or symbols)

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

Getting the printer ready to fax

The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.

LEXMARK X544dn - Getting the printer ready to fax - 1

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax.

LEXMARK X544dn - Getting the printer ready to fax - 2

Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: station name (identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message) and station number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business, other entity, or individual).

To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web Server and then enter the Settings menu.

Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup information.

Using the printer control panel for fax setup

When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time, a series of start-up screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities, then the following screens appear:

Station Name

Station Number

1 When Station Name appears, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.

a Press the button on the numeric keypad that corresponds with the number or letter you want. The first time you press the button, the number for that button appears. When you press the button again, one of the letters assigned to that button appears.

b Press the right arrow button to move to the next space, or wait a few seconds and the cursor will move to the next space.

2 After entering the Station Name, press √.

The display changes to Station Number.

3 When Station Number appears, enter the printer fax number.

a Press the button on the numeric keypad that corresponds with the number you want.
b Press the right arrow button to move to the next space, or wait a few seconds and the cursor will move to the next space.

4 After entering the Station Number, press

LEXMARK X544dn - Using the printer control panel for fax setup - 1

Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 Click inside the Station Name box, and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
6 Click inside the Station Number box, and then enter the printer fax number.
7 Click Submit.

Choosing a fax connection

You can connect the printer with equipment such as a telephone, an answering machine, or a computer modem. To determine the best way to set up the printer, see the following table.

Notes:

  • The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the wall outlet. Other devices (such as a telephone or answering machine) can be successfully attached to pass through the printer, as described in the setup steps.
  • If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, a third-party device (such as a DSL filter) is required. Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter. The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone line that can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly.
  • You do not need to attach the printer to a computer, but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line to send and receive faxes.
Equipment and service options Fax connection setup
Connect directly to the telephone line See “Connecting to an analog telephone line” on page 90
Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL or ADSL) service See “Connecting to a DSL service” on page 90.
Connect to a Private Branch eXchange (PBX) or Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) systemSee “Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system” on page 91.
Use a Distinctive Ring service See “Connecting to a Distinctive Ring Service” on page 91.
Connect to a telephone line, telephone, and answering machineSee “Connecting a telephone or answering machine to the same telephone line” on page 92
Connect through an adapter used in your area See “Connecting to an adapter for your country or region” on page 93.
Connect to a computer with a modem See “Connecting to a computer with a modem” on page 98.

Connecting to an analog telephone line

If your telecommunications equipment uses a US-style (RJ11) telephone line, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the top LINE port ☐ on the back of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

LEXMARK X544dn - Connecting to an analog telephone line - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a cable being inserted into a device with a red arrow indicating the cable's direction (no text or symbols present)

Connecting to a DSL service

If you subscribe to a DSL service, then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord, and then follow these steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the top LINE port ☐ on the back of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter.

Note: Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration.

3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack.

LEXMARK X544dn - Connecting to a DSL service - 1

text_image Diagram showing cable connection to a device with labeled components and a magnified inset view of the device's internal structure.

Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system

If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the top LINE port ☐ on the back of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use.

Notes:

- Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region.

- Depending on the ISDN port assignment, you may have to connect to a specific port.

- When using a PBX, make sure the call waiting tone is off.

- When using a PBX system, dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number.

- For more information on using the fax with a PBX system, see the documentation that came with your PBX system.

Connecting to a Distinctive Ring Service

A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider. This service allows you to have multiple phone numbers on one telephone line with each phone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, follow these steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the top LINE port ☐ on the back of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

LEXMARK X544dn - Connecting to a Distinctive Ring Service - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a cable inserted into a device with an attached connector, no text or symbols present

3 Change the distinctive ring setting to match the setting you want the printer to answer.

a From the printer control panel, press .

b Press the arrow buttons until Settings appears, and then press √.

c Press the arrow buttons until Fax Settings appears, and then press √.

d Press the arrow buttons until Distinctive Rings appears, and then press √.

e Press the arrow buttons until the desired ring tone appears, and then press.

Connecting a telephone or answering machine to the same telephone line

1 Remove the plug from the bottom EXT port on the back of the printer.

LEXMARK X544dn - Connecting a telephone or answering machine to the same telephone line - 1

natural_image Diagram of a computer interface showing a device with a red arrow pointing to a screen, no text or symbols present.

2 Connect your telecommunications equipment directly to the bottom EXT port 📞 on the back of the printer.

LEXMARK X544dn - Connecting a telephone or answering machine to the same telephone line - 2

text_image Diagram showing connection between a device via cable and a telephone, with magnified views of internal components.

Faxing

LEXMARK X544dn - Connecting a telephone or answering machine to the same telephone line - 3

natural_image Illustration of a telephone handset connected to an electrical outlet with a red arrow indicating connection (no text or symbols present)

Connecting to an adapter for your country or region

The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the wall outlet.

Country/region

•Austria•New Zealand
•Cyprus•Netherlands
•Denmark•Norway
•Finland•Portugal
•France•Sweden
•Germany•Switzerland
•Ireland•United Kingdom
•Italy

Countries or regions except Germany

For some countries or regions, a telephone line adapter is included in the box. Use this adapter to connect an answering machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer.

There is a plug installed in the bottom EXT port of the printer. This plug is necessary for the proper functioning of the adapter.

LEXMARK X544dn - Countries or regions except Germany - 1

text_image Diagram showing a device with a magnified view of a window and a red object, likely indicating a component or operation.

Note: Do not remove the plug if you have a serial phone system or wish to connect a phone or answering machine to the adapter. If you remove it, then other telecommunications devices in your home (such as telephones or answering machines) may not work.

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the top LINE port ☐ on the back of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.

Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the telephone jack used in your location.

LEXMARK X544dn - Countries or regions except Germany - 2

text_image Diagram showing cable connection to a server rack with labeled components and a magnified inset highlighting a device detail.

3 Connect the answering machine or telephone to the adapter

LEXMARK X544dn - Countries or regions except Germany - 3

text_image Diagram showing three steps of connection to a device via cable, with magnified insets highlighting terminal hardware and wiring details.

Germany

There is a plug installed in the bottom EXT port of the printer. This plug is necessary for the proper functioning of the fax function and the proper operation of downstream phones.

LEXMARK X544dn - Germany - 1

natural_image Diagram of a device with an open door and a close-up view of the lid (no text or symbols visible)

Note: Do not remove the plug. If you remove it, then other telecommunications devices in your home (such as telephones or answering machines) may not work.

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the top LINE port ☐ on the back of the printer.

2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter, and then connect the adapter to the N slot of an active analog telephone wall jack.

Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the telephone jack used in your location.

LEXMARK X544dn - Germany - 2

text_image Diagram showing airline card connection with labeled components and red arrows indicating installation or repair steps

3 If you would like to use the same line for both fax and telephone communication, then connect a second telephone line (not provided) between the telephone and the F slot of an active analog telephone wall jack.

LEXMARK X544dn - Germany - 3

text_image Diagram showing connections between a telephone, plug-in socket, and cable with a red arrow indicating direction of connection.

Faxing

4 If you would like to use the same line for recording messages on your answering machine, then connect a second telephone line (not provided) between the answering machine and the other N slot of the active analog telephone wall jack.

LEXMARK X544dn - Germany - 4

natural_image Diagram of two electrical plugs connected to a power outlet, with no visible text or symbols

Connecting to a computer with a modem

Connect the printer to a computer with a modem to send faxes from the software program.

Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.

1 Make sure you have the following:

•A telephone
•A computer with a modem
•Three telephone cords
•A telephone wall jack

2 Connect a telephone cord into the top LINE port ☐ of the printer, and then plug it into an active telephone wall jack.

LEXMARK X544dn - Connecting to a computer with a modem - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a cable being inserted into a device with a red arrow indicating the cable's direction (no text or symbols present)

3 Remove the protective plug from the bottom EXT port of the printer.

LEXMARK X544dn - Connecting to a computer with a modem - 2

natural_image Diagram showing a device with a red arrow pointing to a component, no text or symbols present

4 Connect a second telephone cord from the telephone to the computer modem.

Note: Refer to the manual that came with your computer for the telephone connections.

LEXMARK X544dn - Connecting to a computer with a modem - 3

natural_image Illustration of a desktop computer with a handheld telephone and a magnified inset showing a close-up of the screen (no text or symbols present)

5 Connect a third telephone cord from the computer modem to the bottom EXT port 📞 of the printer.

LEXMARK X544dn - Connecting to a computer with a modem - 4

natural_image Diagram showing connections between a computer tower, a wall-mounted device, and a telephone receiver (no text or symbols present)

Setting the outgoing fax name and number

To have the designated fax name and fax number printed on outgoing faxes:

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 Click inside the Station Name box, and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
6 Click inside the Station Number box, and then enter the printer fax number.
7 Click Submit.

Setting the date and time

You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, you may have to reset the date and time. To set the date and time:

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Settings.
3 Click Set Date and Time.
4 Click inside the Set Date & Time box, and then enter the current date and time.
5 Click Submit.

Turning daylight saving time on or off

The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Settings.
3 Click Set Date and Time.
4 In the Daylight Savings box, click on one of the following:

Yes turns daylight saving on.

No turns daylight saving off.

5 Click Submit.

Sending a fax

Sending a fax using the printer control panel

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press the Fax button.

To: appears on the first line, and the time and date appear on the second line.

4 Enter the fax number, and then press.

Notes:

  • To place a dial pause within a fax number, press the Redial/Pause button. The dial pause appears as a comma on the Fax to: line. Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.
  • Press to move the cursor to the left and delete a number.
  • To use a fax shortcut, press ☐, and then press the arrow buttons until the fax shortcut you want appears. Then, press √

5 Press 1 to enter another fax number, or press 2 to end fax number entry.

6 Press to send a black only fax or to send a color fax.

Sending a fax using the computer

Faxing from a computer lets you send electronic documents without leaving your desk. This gives you the flexibility of faxing documents directly from software programs.

For Windows users

Notes:

  • In order to perform this function from your computer, you must use the PostScript printer driver for your printer.
  • Verify that the fax option is installed in the printer driver.

1 With a file open, click File → Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click the Other Options tab, and then click Fax.
4 On the Fax screen, type the name and number of the fax recipient.
5 Click OK, and then click OK again.
6 Click OK.

For Mac OS X version 10.2 and 10.3 users

1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
2 From the print options pop-up menu, choose Job Routing.

Faxing

3 Select Fax, and then enter the recipient name, number, and other information as needed.
4 Click Print.

For Mac OS X version 10.4 or later users

1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
2 From the PDF pop-up menu, choose Fax PDF.
3 Type the fax number in the To field, and enter other information as needed.
4 Click Fax.

If you receive an error, "No fax modems were found", follow these directions to add your printer as a fax:

a From the Printer pop-up menu, choose Add Printer.
b Select the printer from the dialog that appears.
c From the Print Using pop-up menu, choose Select a driver to use.
d From the list, choose your printer fax model, and then click Add.

Creating shortcuts

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. You can create a shortcut to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Settings.
3 Click Manage Destinations.

Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support person.

4 Click Fax Shortcut Setup.
5 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.

To create a multiple-number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.

Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).

6 Assign a shortcut number.

If you enter a number that is already in use, you are prompted to select another number.

7 Click Add.

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press the Fax button.

To: appears on the first line, and the time and date appear on the second line.

4 Press

LEXMARK X544dn - Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel - 1

Address Book Search appears.

5 Press the arrow buttons until Add appears, and then press

LEXMARK X544dn - Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel - 2

6 Press the arrow buttons until Enter Fax Number appears, and then press √.
7 Enter the fax number, and then press.
8 Press 1 to enter another fax number, or press 2 to end fax number entry.
9 After selecting 2=NO, Enter Name appears.

a Press the button on the keypad that corresponds with the letter you want. The first time you press the button, the number for that button appears. When you press the button again, one of the letters assigned to that button appears.
b Press the right arrow button to move to the next space, or wait a few seconds and the cursor will move to the next space.
c Once the fax name is entered, press . √

Save as Shortcut appears.

d Enter the shortcut number, and then press . √

Using shortcuts and the address book

Using fax destination shortcuts

Fax destination shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. You can assign shortcut numbers when creating permanent fax destinations. Permanent fax destinations or speed dial numbers are created in the Manage Destinations link located under the Configuration tab on the Embedded Web Server. A shortcut number (1–99999) can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients. By creating a group fax destination with a shortcut number, you can quickly and easily fax broadcast information to an entire group.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 Press

LEXMARK X544dn - Using fax destination shortcuts - 1

Enter Shortcut: appears.

4 Enter the shortcut number.

5 Press to send a black only fax or to send a color fax.

Using the address book

Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, contact your system support person.

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press the Fax button.

To: appears on the first line, and the time and date appear on the second line.

4 Press ☐, and then press the arrow buttons until the fax number you want appears. Then, press √.

Customizing fax settings

Changing the fax resolution

Adjusting the resolution setting changes the quality of the fax. Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (slowest speed, best quality).

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the Fax area of the printer control panel, press the Resolution area.
4 Press the arrow buttons until the resolution value you want appears, and then press.
5 Press to send a black only copy or to send a color copy.

Making a fax lighter or darker

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press the Darkness button.
4 Press the arrow buttons to make the fax lighter or darker.
5 Press .
6 Press to send a black only fax or to send a color fax.

Sending a fax at a scheduled time

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press the Fax button.

To: appears on the first line, and the time and date appear on the second line.

4 Enter the fax number, and then press.

5 From the Fax area, press the Options button.

6 Press the arrow buttons until Delayed Send appears, and then press √.

Set Send Time appears on the first line, and HH:MM with a blinking cursor appears on the second line.

7 Using the numeric keypad, enter the time you want to send the fax. After you enter the time, the cursor moves to the AM or PM field if the printer clock is set to 12 Hour format. Press the arrow buttons to change from AM to PM or PM to AM.

8 Press .

Set Send Date appears on the first line, and MM-DD-YYYY with a blinking cursor appears on the second line.

9 Using the numeric keypad, enter the date you want to send the fax.

10 Press √

11 Press to send a black only fax or to send a color fax.

Viewing a fax log

1 Open a Web browser.

2 In the address bar, type the IP address of the printer, and then press Enter.

3 Click Reports.

4 Click Fax Settings.

5 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.

Canceling an outgoing fax

A fax can be canceled when the document is in the ADF or on the scanner glass. To cancel a fax:

1 From the printer control panel, press .

Stopping appears, and then Cancel Job appears.

2 Press to cancel the job.

Note: If you want to continue to process the job, press to resume scanning the fax.

Canceling appears.

The printer clears all pages in the ADF and then cancels the job.

Understanding fax options

Original Size

This option lets you choose the size of the documents you are going to fax.

1 From the Fax area of the printer control panel, press the Options button.

Original Size appears.

2 Press

LEXMARK X544dn - Original Size - 1

3 Press the arrow buttons until the size of the original document appears, and then press √.

Content

This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Content affects the quality and size of your scan.

  • Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background
  • Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures
  • Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the amount of information saved.

Sides (Duplex)

This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.

Note: Duplex scanning is not available on selected printer models.

Resolution

This option increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo, a drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, then increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.

•Standard—Suitable for most documents
•Fine—Recommended for documents with small print
- Super fine—Recommended for original documents with fine detail

Darkness

This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.

Improving fax quality

Question Tip
When should I use Text mode?•Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the fax, and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.•Text mode is recommended for faxing receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that contain only text or fine line art.
When should I use Text/Photo mode?•Use Text/Photo mode when faxing an original document that contains a mixture of text and graphics.•Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and brochures.
When should I use Photo mode? Use Photo mode when faxing photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper.

Forwarding a fax

This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 Click inside the Fax Forwarding box, and then select one of the following:

  • Print
  • Print and Forward
    -Forward

6 From the Forward to list, select Fax.

7 Click inside the Forward to Shortcut box, and then enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.

Note: The shortcut number must be a valid shortcut number for the setting that was selected in the "Forward to" box.

8 Click Submit.

Scanning to an FTP address

ADF Scanner glass

LEXMARK X544dn - ADF Scanner glass - 1

natural_image Illustration of a printer with paper and a red arrow indicating print direction (no text or symbols)

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.

LEXMARK X544dn - ADF Scanner glass - 2

natural_image Illustration of an open printer with a red arrow pointing to the lid area, showing paper sheet layout (no text or symbols)

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be sent to the server at a time.

Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer. Sending a document to an FTP server is similar to sending a fax. The difference is that you are sending the information over your network instead of over the phone line.

Scanning to an FTP address

Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

3 From the printer control panel, press the Scan/Email button.

4 Press the arrow buttons until FTP appears, and then press .

5 Type the FTP address.

6 Press to send a black-only copy or to send a color copy.

Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number

1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the printer control panel, press the Scan/Email button.
4 Press the arrow buttons until FTP appears, and then press √
5 Press, and then enter the recipient's shortcut number.
6 Press 1 to enter another shortcut or press 2 to end the shortcut entry.

After you press 2, Press Start To Begin appears.

7 Press to send a black-only copy or to send a color copy.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Destinations.

Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support person.

4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup.
5 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).
6 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.

If you enter a number that is already in use, you are prompted to select another number.

Scanning to a computer or USB flash memory device

ADF Scanner glass

LEXMARK X544dn - ADF Scanner glass - 1

text_image ABC

Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.

LEXMARK X544dn - ADF Scanner glass - 2

natural_image Illustration of an open printer with a red arrow pointing to the inner page, showing paper and document (no text or symbols present)

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a USB flash memory device. The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.

Note: Scanning to a computer or USB device is not available on selected printer models.

Scanning to a computer

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Scan Profile.

3 Click Create Scan Profile.

4 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.

5 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.

6 Enter a profile name.

The profile name is also the user name, it is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.

7 Click Submit.

8 Scan your document.

A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit. Remember this shortcut number and use it when you are ready to scan your documents.

a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

b If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

c Press the Scan/Email button.

d Press the arrow buttons until Profiles appears, and then press √.

e Press . #

Enter Shortcut: appears.

f Enter the shortcut number.

g Press or to send the scanned image.

Note: The scan settings determine if the image is sent in black or color. Pressing the black or color button does not change these settings.

9 Return to the computer to view the file.

The output file is saved in the location you specified or launched in the program you specified.

Scanning to a USB flash memory device

Note: The USB port is not available on selected printer models.

1 Insert a USB flash memory device into the front USB port.

Access USB appears.

Note: When a USB flash memory device is inserted into the printer, the printer can only scan to the USB device or print files from the USB device. All other printer functions are unavailable.

2 Press 1 on the keypad.

3 Press the arrow buttons until Scan to USB appears, and then press √.

Press Start To Begin appears.

4 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

5 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

6 Press or to send the scanned image.

Note: The scan settings determine if the image is sent in black or color. Pressing the black or color button does not change these settings.

Understanding scan to computer options

Sides (Duplex)

This option informs the printer if your original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document.

Note: Duplex scanning is not available on selected printer models.

Darkness

This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.

Improving scan quality

Question Tip
When should I use Text mode?•Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the scan, and preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.•Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and documents that only contain text or fine line art.
When should I use Text/Photo mode?•Use Text/Photo mode when scanning an original document that contains a mixture of text and graphics.•Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business graphics, and brochures.
When should I use Photo mode? Use Photo mode when scanning photos printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper.

Using the Scan Center software

Understanding the Scan Center features

The Scan Center software lets you modify scan settings and select where to send the scanned output. Scan settings modified with the Scan Center software can be saved and used for other scan jobs.

The following features are available:

  • Scan and send images to your computer
  • Convert scanned images to text
  • Preview the scanned image and adjust the brightness and contrast
    •Make larger scans without losing detail
  • Scan two-sided documents

Using the ScanBack utility

Using the ScanBack Utility

You can use the Lexmark ScanBack™ Utility instead of the Embedded Web Server to create Scan to PC profiles. The ScanBack Utility is on the Software and Documentation CD.

1 Set up your Scan to PC profile.

a Launch the ScanBack Utility.
b Select the printer you want to use.

If no printers are listed, then see your system support person to obtain a list, or click the Setup button to manually search for an IP address or hostname.

c Follow the instructions on the screens to define the type of document being scanned and what kind of output you want to create.
d Make sure to select:

• Show MFP Instructions—if you want to view or print the final directions
- Create Shortcut—if you want to save this group of settings to use again

e Click Finish.

A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images.

2 Scan your original documents.

a Locate the printer you specified in the scan profile.
b Load all pages in the ADF or on the scanner glass.
c From the printer control panel, press Scan/Email.
d Press the arrow buttons until Profiles appears, and then press √.
e Press the arrow buttons until your scan profile name appears, and then press.

f Press or to send the scanned image.

Note: The scan settings determine if the image is sent in black or color. Pressing the black or color button does not change these settings.

g Return to your computer.

Your output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified.

Clearing jams

Avoiding jams

The following hints can help you avoid jams.

Paper tray recommendations

•Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray.
- Do not remove trays while the printer is printing.
- Do not load trays, the multipurpose feeder, or the envelope feeder while the printer is printing. Load them prior to printing, or wait for a prompt to load them.
- Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.
- Make sure the guides in the paper trays, multipurpose feeder, or envelope feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes.
- Push all trays in firmly after loading paper.

Paper recommendations

  • Use only recommended paper or specialty media. For more information, see "Paper types and weights supported by the printer" on page 62.
  • Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
  • Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.
  • Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
  • Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.
  • Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.
  • Store paper per the manufacturer's recommendations.

Envelope recommendations

  • To reduce wrinkling, use the Envelope Enhance menu in the Paper menu.
  • Do not feed envelopes that:

—Have excessive curl or twist
—Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
—Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
—Have an interlocking design
—Have postage stamps attached
—Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
—Have bent corners
—Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
—Are stuck together or damaged in any way

Understanding jam numbers and locations

When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears. The following illustration and table list the paper jams that can occur and the location of each jam. Open doors and covers, and remove trays to access jam locations.

LEXMARK X544dn - Understanding jam numbers and locations - 1

text_image Technical diagram of an open printer with numbered parts, showing internal structure and assembly views
Jam numberJam location Instructions
1200 Standard250-sheet tray and manual feeder (Tray 1)1 Open the front door. Inspect the area behind the front door, and then remove any jams.2 Open the fuser cover. Inspect the area under the cover, and then remove any jams.3 Close the front door.4 Pull Tray 1 out. Inspect the tray area, and then remove any jams.5 Verify that the paper is loaded correctly.6 Reinsert Tray 1.
2201 Under the fuserfuser
3202 In the fuser
4230 In the duplexlex
5235 In the duplexlexNote: This jam number indicates that the paper being used for a duplex print job is not supported.
6242 and 243 550-sheet tray1 Pull the 550-sheet tray out, and then remove any jams.2 Reinsert the tray.
7250 In the multipurpose feeder1 Press the release latch to the left to release the multipurpose feeder.2 Inspect the multipurpose feeder, and then remove any jams.3 Close the multipurpose feeder.Note: You may need to open the 650-sheet duo tray to remove jammed pages behind the multipurpose feeder.
8290 ADF Openthe ADF cover, and then remove the jam.

200 paper jam

1 Grasp the handle, and pull the standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1) and manual feeder out.

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 1

natural_image Diagram of a printer's internal structure with a red arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols present)

2 Remove the jam.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Insert the tray.

4 Press

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 2

201 paper jam

1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 1

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 2

natural_image Illustration of a printer with red arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols)

2 Remove the jammed paper.

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 3

natural_image Illustration of a printer with internal components and a red arrow indicating a process (no text or symbols present)

Notes:

•Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
- There may be a second sheet jammed if 200.xx Paper Jam and 202.xx Paper Jam appear.

3 Close the front door.

4 Press

LEXMARK X544dn - Notes: - 1

202 paper jam

1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 1

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 2

natural_image Illustration of a printer with red arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols)

Clearing jams

2 Grasp the green lever, and then pull the fuser cover toward you.

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 3

natural_image Diagram of a printer's internal structure showing paper feed, paper tray, and printer casing with red arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols present)

3 Hold the fuser cover down, and then remove the jammed paper. The fuser cover closes when released.

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 4

natural_image Diagram of a printer's internal structure showing internal components and a red arrow indicating a specific component (no text or symbols present)

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

4 Close the front door.

5 Press

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 5

230 paper jam

1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.

2 Remove the jam.

3 Press

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 1

235 paper jam

This jam occurs when the paper is too short for the duplex unit.

1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.

2 Remove the jam.

3 Load the tray with the correct paper size (A4, letter, legal, folio).

4 Insert the tray.

5 Close the front door.

6 Press

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 1

242 and 243 paper jams

1 Grasp the handle, and pull the optional 550-sheet tray out.

LEXMARK X544dn - and 243 paper jams - 1

natural_image Diagram of a printer drawer with internal components and a red arrow indicating a loading or movement (no text or symbols present)

Note: The optional 550-sheet tray is not available on all printer models.

2 Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Insert the tray.

4 Press

LEXMARK X544dn - and 243 paper jams - 2

250 paper jam

1 Push the lever in the multipurpose feeder to access the paper jammed.

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 1

natural_image Diagram of a printer's internal structure showing internal components and a red arrow indicating a downward motion (no text or symbols present)

2 Remove the jam.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Insert the tray.

4 Press

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 2

290 paper jam

1 Remove all original documents from the ADF.
2 Open the ADF cover, and then remove any jammed paper.

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 1

natural_image Illustration of an open printer with a red arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols present)

3 Close the ADF cover.

4 Open the scanner cover, and then remove any jammed pages.

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 2

natural_image Illustration of a printer with an open lid and a red arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols present)

5 Close the scanner cover.

6 Press

LEXMARK X544dn - paper jam - 3

Understanding printer menus

A number of menus are available to make it easy for you to change printer settings. These menus can be accessed from the printer control panel, Embedded Web Server, or the software application driver.

Notes:

  • Certain menus are not available on selected printer models.
  • A setting with an * indicates it is the current default setting.

Supplies Menu Paper Menu Reports Network/Ports

Cyan CartridgeDefault SourceMenu Settings PageActive NIC
Magenta CartridgeSize/TypeDevice StatisticsNetwork Menu
Yellow CartridgePaper TextureNetwork Setup PageWireless Menu
Black CartridgePaper WeightWireless Setup PageUSB Menu
Imaging KitPaper LoadingShortcut List
Waste Toner BottleCustom TypeFax Job Log
Custom Scan SizesFax Call Log
Universal SetupCopy Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Print Defects
Print Demo
Asset Report

Settings

General Settings Copy Settings Fax Settings Flash Drive Menu Print Settings Set Date/Time

Supplies menu

Menu item Description
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, or Black Toner CartridgesEarly WarningLowInvalidReplaceMissing or DefectiveOKUnsupportedShows the status of the toner cartridgesNote: 88 ReplaceCartridge indicates the cartridge is nearly empty, and print quality problems may result.
Imaging KitOKReplace Black Imaging KitReplace Black and Color Imaging KitShows the status of the imaging kit
Waste Toner BoxNear FullReplaceMissingOKShows the status of the waste toner bottle

Paper menu

Default Source menu

Menu item Description
Default SourceTrayMP FeederManual PaperManual EnvSets a default paper source for all print jobsNotes:The 650-sheet-duo drawer must be installed in order for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting in the Paper Menu.Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.Only installed paper sources will appear as menu settings.A paper source selected by a print job will override the Default Source setting for the duration of the print job.If the same size and type of paper are in more than one tray, and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match, the trays are automatically linked. When one tray is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.

Size/Type menu

Menu item Description
TraySizeLetterLegalExecutiveOficio (Mexico)FolioUniversalA4A5JIS B5Specifies the paper size loaded in each trayNotes:Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match, the trays are automatically linked. When one tray is empty, the job prints using paper from the linked tray.
TrayTypePlain PaperCard StockTransparencyRecycledGlossyLabelsBondLetterheadPreprintedColored PaperLight PaperHeavy PaperRough/CottonCustom TypeSpecifies the type of paper loaded in each trayNotes:Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Typeis the factory default setting for all other trays.If available, a user-defined name will appear instead of Custom Type.Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking.
Manual Paper SizeLetterLegalExecutiveOficio (Mexico)FolioStatementUniversalA4A5A5JIS B5Specifies the size of the paper being manually loadedNote:Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Manual Paper TypePlain PaperCard StockTransparencyRecycledGlossyLabelsBondLetterheadPreprintedColored PaperLight PaperHeavy PaperRough/CottonCustom TypeSpecifies the type of paper being manually loadedNote: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
MP Feeder SizeLetterLegalExecutiveOficio (Mexico)FolioStatementUniversalA4A5A5JIS B5Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feederNotes:From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.The multipurpose feeder does not automatically sense paper size. The paper size value must be set.
MP Feeder TypePlain PaperCard StockTransparencyRecycledGlossyLabelsBondLetterheadPreprintedColored PaperLight PaperHeavy PaperRough/CottonCustom TypeSpecifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.Notes:From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Manual Envelope Size10 EnvelopeDL EnvelopeC5 EnvelopeB5 EnvelopeOther Envelope7 3/4 Envelope9 EnvelopeSpecifies the size of the envelope being manually loadedNote: 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting. DL Envelope is the international factory default setting.
Manual Envelope TypeEnvelopeCustom TypeSpecifies the type of envelope being manually loadedNote: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.

Paper Texture menu

Menu item Description
Plain TextureSmoothNormalRoughSpecifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific trayNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock TextureSmoothNormalRoughSpecifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific trayNotes:•Normal is the factory default setting.•Settings appear only if card stock is supported.
Transparency TextureSmoothNormalRoughSpecifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific trayNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled TextureSmoothNormalRoughSpecifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific trayNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Glossy TextureSmoothNormalRoughSpecifies the relative texture of the Glossy paper loaded in a specific trayNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels TextureSmoothNormalRoughSpecifies the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific trayNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond TextureSmoothNormalRoughSpecifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific trayNote: Rough is the factory default setting.
Envelope TextureSmoothNormalRoughSpecifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific trayNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Letterhead TextureSmoothNormalRoughSpecifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific trayNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted TextureSmoothNormalRoughSpecifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific trayNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored TextureSmoothNormalRoughSpecifies the relative texture of the colored paper loaded in a specific trayNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light PaperSmoothNormalRoughSpecifies the relative texture of the light paper loaded in a specific trayNotes:Normal is the factory default setting.Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.
Heavy PaperSmoothNormalRoughSpecifies the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded in a specific trayNotes:Normal is the factory default setting.Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.
Rough/Cotton PaperRoughSpecifies the relative texture of the rough/cotton paper loaded in a specific trayNotes:Rough is the factory default setting.Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.
CustomPaperSmoothNormalRoughSpecifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific trayNotes:Normal is the factory default setting.Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.

Paper Weight menu

Menu items Definition
Plain Weight, Glossy Weight, Bond Weight, Letterhead Weight, Preprinted Weight, or Colored WeightLightNormalHeavyIdentifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific trayNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Transparency WeightLightNormalHeavyIdentifies the relative weight of the transparencies loaded in a specific trayNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled WeightLightNormalHeavyIdentifies the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded in a specific trayNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels WeightLightNormalHeavyIdentifies the relative weight of the labels loaded in a specific trayNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Envelope WeightLightNormalHeavyIdentifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray or feederNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock WeightLightNormalHeavyIdentifies the relative weight of the card stock loaded in a specific trayNotes:Normal is the factory default setting.Settings appear only if card stock is supported.
Light Paper WeightLightIdentifies the relative weight of the light paper loaded in a specific trayNotes:Light is the factory default setting.Settings appear only if light paper is supported.
Heavy Paper WeightHeavyIdentifies the relative weight of the heavy paper loaded in a specific trayNotes:Heavy is the factory default setting.Settings appear only if heavy paper is supported.
Rough/Cotton Paper WeightNormalIdentifies the relative weight of the rough/cotton paper loaded in a specific trayNotes:Normal is the factory default setting.Settings appear only if rough/cotton paper is supported.
CustomLightNormalHeavyIdentifies the relative weight of the custom paper type loaded in a specific trayNotes:Normal is the factory default setting.Settings appear only if custom paper is supported.

Paper Loading menu

Note: Certain options are not available on selected printer models.

Menu item Description
Recycled LoadingDuplexOffDetermines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Recycled as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Glossy LoadingDuplexOffDetermines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Glossy as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Bond LoadingDuplexOffDetermines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Bond as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Letterhead LoadingDuplexOffDetermines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Letterhead as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Preprinted LoadingDuplexOffDetermines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Preprinted as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Colored LoadingDuplexOffDetermines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Colored as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Light Paper LoadingDuplexOffDetermines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Light Paper as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Note: Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from Print Properties (in Windows) or the Print dialog (in Macintosh).
Heavy Paper LoadingDuplexOffDetermines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Heavy Paper as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton LoadingDuplexOffDetermines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Rough/Cotton as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
CustomLoadingDuplexOffDetermines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify Customas the paper typeNotes:Off is the factory default setting.CustomLoading is available only if the custom type is supported.
Note: Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from Print Properties (in Windows) or the Print dialog (in Macintosh).

Custom Types menu

Menu item Description
Custom TypePaperCard StockTransparencyGlossyLabelsEnvelopeRough/CottonAssociates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom Type. name or a user-defined Custom Name created from the Embedded Web Server or MarkVisionTM Professional. This user-defined name displays instead ofCustom Type.Notes:Paper is the factory default setting.The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or feeder in order for you to print from that source.
RecycledPaperCard StockTransparencyGlossyLabelsEnvelopeCottonSpecifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menusNotes:Paper is the factory default setting.The Recycled type must be supported by the selected tray or feeder in order for you to print from that source.

Custom Scan Sizes menu

Menu item Description
ID CardWidth1–14 inches (25–355.6 mm)Height1–14 inches (25–355.6 mm)OrientationLandscapePortrait2 scans per sideOffOnSpecifies a non-standard scan size.Notes:4.83 inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 123 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Width.6.32 inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 161 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Height.Landscape is the factory default setting for Orientation.On is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.
Custom Scan SizeScan Size NameWidth1–14 inches (25–355.6 mm)Height1–14 inches (25–355.6 mm)OrientationLandscapePortrait2 scans per sideOffOnSpecifies a custom scan size name and options. This name replaces a Custom Scan Sizename in the printer menus.Notes:8.5 inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 216 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Width.14 inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 356 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Height.Landscape is the factory default setting for Orientation.Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.

Universal Setup menu

These menu items are used to specify the height and width of the Universal Paper Size. The Universal Paper Size is a user-defined paper size setting. It is listed with the other paper size settings and includes similar options, such as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet.

Menu item Description
Units of MeasureInchesMillimetersIdentifies the units of measureNotes:Inches is the US factory default setting.Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Portrait Width3–14.7 inches76–360 mmSets the portrait widthNotes:If the width exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum width allowed.8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased in 0.01-inch increments.216 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can be increased in 1-mm increments.
Portrait Height3–14.7 inches76–360 mmSets the portrait heightNotes:If the height exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum height allowed.14 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased in 0.01-inch increments.356 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can be increased in 1-mm increments.

Reports menu

Reports menu

Note: When you select a menu item from the Reports menu, the indicated report prints.

Menu item Description
Menu Settings PagePrints a report containing information about paper loaded into trays, installed memory, the total page count, alarms, timeouts, the printer control panel language, the TCP/IP address, the status of supplies, the status of the network connection, and other information
Device StatisticsPrints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages
Network Setup PagePrints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address informationNote: This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected to print servers.
Shortcut ListPrints a report containing information about configured shortcuts
Fax Job LogPrints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes
Fax Call LogPrints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and blocked calls
Copy ShortcutsPrints a report containing information about copy shortcuts
E-mail ShortcutsPrints a report containing information about e-mail shortcuts
Fax ShortcutsPrints a report containing information about fax shortcuts
Profiles ListPrints a list of profiles stored in the printer
Print FontsPrints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer
Print DefectsPrints a repeating defects page used as a diagnostic tool for identifying print problemsNote:Should be printed on letter- or A4-size paper. If printed on smaller paper, the content will be clipped.
Print DemoPrints a resident demonstration page
Asset ReportPrints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned into an asset database.

Network/Ports

Active NIC menu

Menu item Description
Active NICAutoList of networksShows the print serverNote: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.

Network menu

Menu item Description
PCL SmartSwitchOnOffSets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitchOnOffSets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA ModeOffAutoSets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocolNotes:·Auto is the factory default setting·Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Network BufferDisabledAutoSets the size of the network input bufferNotes:·Auto is the factory default setting.·The value can be changed in 1-K increments.·The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.·To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the USB buffer.·Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Mac Binary PSOnOffAutoSets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobsNotes:·Auto is the factory default setting.·The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.·The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Network SetupReports MenuNetwork Card menuTCIP MenuIPv6 MenuWireless menuAppleTalk menuLists all the network setup menus, regardless of the active network of the printerNote:Certain options are not available on selected printer models.

Wireless menu

Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings.

Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers when an optional wireless internal print server is installed in the printer.

Menu item Description
ModeInfrastructureAd hocLets you select a modeNotes:Infrastructure mode makes the printer wireless network accessible through an access point.Ad hoc mode configures the printer for peer-to-peer wireless networking.
Compatibility802.11n802.11b/g802.11b/g/nLets you select a setting that is compatible with your equipment
Choose Network<list of available network names>Lets you select an available network for the printer to use
View Signal QualityLets you view the strength of the wireless connection
View Security ModeLets you view the security of the wireless connection

USB menu

Menu item Description
PCL SmartSwitchOnOffSets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitchOnOffSets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA ModeOffAutoSets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocolNotes:Auto is the factory default setting.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
USB BufferDisabledAutoSets the size of the USB input bufferNotes:•Auto is the factory default setting.•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.
Mac Binary PSOnOffAutoSets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobsNotes:•Auto is the factory default setting.•The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.•The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
ENA AddressSets the network address information for an external print server that is attached to the printer using a USB cableNote:This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external printer server through the USB port.
ENA NetmaskSets the netmask information for an external print server that is attached to the printer using a USB cableNote:This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.
ENA GatewaySets the gateway information for an external print server that is attached to the printer using a USB cableNote:This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port.

Settings menu

General Settings menu

Menu item Description
Display LanguageEnglishFrancaisDeutschItalianoEspanolDanskNorskNederlandsSvenskaPortugueseSuomiRussianPolskiMagyarTurkceCeskySimplified ChineseTraditional ChineseKoreanJapaneseSets the language of the text appearing on the displayNote:All languages may not be available for all printers.
Eco-ModeOffEnergyEnergy/PaperPaperMinimizes the use of energy, paper, or specialty mediaNotes:Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the printer to its factory default settings.The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer. Performance may be affected but quality is not.Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job. Performance may be affected but quality is not.Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media.
Quiet ModeOffOnReduces the amount of noise produced by the printerNotes:Off is the factory default setting.On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible.
Run Initial setupYesNoInstructs the printer to run the setup wizardNotes:Yes is the factory default setting.After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the Country select screen, the default setting becomes No.
Paper SizesU.S.MetricSpecifies the printer factory default measurements. The default setting is determined by the country selection in the initial setup wizard.
Scan to PC Port RangeSpecifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers separated by a semicolon.Note:9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Default ModeCopyFaxSets the function the printer enters when Go, Content, Darkness, or any number is pressed on the printer control panelNote:Copy is the factory default setting
Date FormatMM-DD-YYYYDD-MM-YYYYYYYY-MM-DDFormats the printer dateNote:MM-DD-YYYY is the US factory default setting and DD-MM-YYYY is the international factory default setting.
Time Format12 hour A.M./P.M.24 hour clockFormats the printer timeNote:The factory default setting is 12 hour A.M./P.M.
AlarmsAlarm ControlCartridge AlarmSets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator intervention. Available selections for each alarm type are:OffSingleContinuousNotes:Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. Single sounds three quick beeps.Off means no alarm will sound.Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
TimeoutsPower SaverDisabled1–240Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before some systems begin entering a minimum power state.Note:30 minutes is the factory default setting.
TimeoutsScreen Timeout15–300Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before returning the printer display to a Ready stateNote:30 seconds is the factory default setting.
TimeoutsPrint TimeoutDisabled1-255Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end-of-job message before canceling the remainder of the print jobNotes:90 seconds is the factory default setting.When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting.Print Timeout is available only when using PCL or PPDS emulation. This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
TimeoutsWait TimeoutDisabled15-65535Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print jobNotes:40 seconds is the factory default setting.Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL or PPDS emulation print jobs.
Print RecoveryAuto ContinueDisabled5-255Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time periodNotes:Disabled is the factory default setting.5-255 is a range of time in seconds.
Print RecoveryJam RecoveryOnOffAutoSpecifies whether the printer reprints jammed pagesNotes:Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks.On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print RecoveryPage ProtectOnOffLets the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwiseNotes:Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints.
Factory DefaultsDo Not RestoreRestore NowReturns the printer settings to the factory default settingsNotes:Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not Restore keeps the user-defined settings.Restore returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All downloads stored in RAM are deleted.

Copy Settings menu

Menu item Description
ContentTextText/PhotoPhotographSpecifies the type of content contained in the copy jobNotes:•Text emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background.•Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures.•Photograph tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases the amount of information saved.
Sides (Duplex)1 sided to 1 sided1 sided to 2 sided2 sided to 1 sided2 sided to 2 sidedSpecifies whether an original document is duplex (two-sided) or simplex (one-sided), and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplexNotes:•Duplex is not available on selected models.•1 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied page will have printing on one side.•1 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied page will have printing on both sides. For example, if the original is six sheets, the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides.•2 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The copied page will have printing on only one side. For example, if the original draft is three sheets of paper with an image on each side of each sheet, then the copy is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet.•2 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The copy mimics the original exactly.
Paper SaverOff2 on 1 Portrait2 on 1 Landscape4 on 1 Portrait4 on 1 LandscapeSets two or four sheets of an original document together on the same pageNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Print Page BordersOnOffSpecifies whether a border is printed around the edge of the page at the marginsNote: Off is the factory default setting.
CollateOnOffKeeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when making multiple copies of the jobNote: On is the factory default setting.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementUniversalID Card4 x 6 in.3 x 5 in.Business CardCustom Scan SizeA4A5Oficio (Mexico)A6JIS B5Specifies the paper size of the original documentNotes:Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.A setting with an * indicates it is the current default setting.
Paper SourceTraySingle Sheet FeederMulti Sheet FeederSpecifies the paper source for copy jobsNote: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Transparency SeparatorsOnOffPlaces a sheet of paper between transparenciesNote: On is the factory default setting.
Separator SheetsNoneBetween CopiesBetween JobsBetween PagesPlaces a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs based on the value selectedNote: None is the factory default setting.
Separator SourceTrayManual FeederSpecifies a paper sourceNote: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Darkness-4 to +4Specifies the level of darkness for the copy jobNote: The factory default setting is 0.
Number of Copies1–999Specifies the number of copies for the copy jobNote: The factory default setting is 1.
OverlayOffConfidentialCopyDraftUrgentCustomSpecifies overlay text that is printed on each page of the copy jobNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Allow priority copiesOnOffAllows interruption of a print job to copy a page or documentNote: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal-4 to +4Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copyNote: The factory default setting is 0.
Color BalanceCyan-RedMagenta-GreenYellow-BlueSpecifies the amount of color from -4 to +4.Note: The factory default setting is 0.
Contrast0-5Best for contentSpecifies the contrast used for the copy jobNote: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to +4Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copyNote: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edgeOnOffSpecifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge prior to copyingNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1-5Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a copyNote: 3 is the factory default setting.

Fax Settings menu

General Fax Settings

Menu item Description
Station NameSpecifies the name of the fax within the printer
Station NumberSpecifies a number associated with the fax
Station IDSpecifies how the fax is identified
Station Name
Station Number
Enable Manual FaxOnOffSets the printer to fax manually only, which requires a line splitter and a telephone hand setNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number.Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Memory UseAll receiveMostly receiveEqualMostly sentAll sendDefines the amount of non-volatile memory used to fax a jobNotes:"All receive" specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs."Mostly receive" specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts."Mostly sent" specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs."All send" specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
Cancel FaxesAllowDon't AllowSpecifies whether the printer may cancel fax jobsNote:If Cancel Faxes is not enabled, it will not appear as an option.
Caller IDFSKDTMFSpecifies the type of caller ID being usedNote:FSK is the factory default setting.

Fax Send Settings

Menu item Description
ResolutionStandardFineSuper FineUltra FineSpecifies quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives greater print quality, but it increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveMixed Letter/LegalFolioStatementA4A5A6Oficio (Mexico)JIS B54 x 63 x 5ID CardUniversalCustom Scan SizeBusiness CardSpecifies the paper size of the document that is being scannedNote:Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
DuplexOffLong edgeShort edgeSpecifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
ContentTextText/PhotoPhotographSpecifies the type of content that will be scanned to faxNotes:Text is used when the document is mostly text.Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art.Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print.
Darkness-4 to +4Lightens or darkens the outputNote:0 is the factory default setting.
Dial PrefixA numeric entry field is provided to enter numbers
Automatic Redial0-9Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified numberNote:5 is the factory default setting.
Redial Frequency1-200Specifies the number of minutes between redialsNote:3 minutes is the factory default setting.
Behind a PABXYesNoEnables switchboard blind dialing without a dial toneNote: No is the factory default setting.
Enable ECMYesNoEnables Error Correction Mode for fax jobsNote: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable Fax ScansOnOffLets you send faxes by scanning at the printerNote: On is the factory default setting.
Driver to faxYesNoAllows driver to fax jobs to be sent by the printerNote: Yes is the factory default setting.
Dial ModeTonePulseSpecifies the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulseNote: Tone is the factory default setting.
Max Speed2400480096001440033600Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sentNote: 33600 baud is the factory default setting.
Background Removal-4 to +4Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copyNote: 0 is the factory default setting.
ContrastBest for content0-5Specifies the contrast of the outputNote: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to +4Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copyNote: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edgeOnOffSpecifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edgeNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1-5Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a faxNote: 3 is the factory default setting.
Enable Color Fax ScansOnOffEnables color faxingNote: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono FaxesOnOffConverts all outgoing faxes to black and whiteNote: On is the factory default setting.

Fax Receive Settings

Menu item Description
Enable Fax ReceiveOnOffAllows fax jobs to be received by the printerNote: On is the factory default setting.
Rings to Answer1-25Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax jobNote: 3 is the factory default setting.
Auto AnswerYesNoAllows the printer to answer an incoming fax jobNote: Yes is the factory default setting.
Manual Answer Code1-9Lets you enter a code on the telephone number pad to begin receiving a faxNotes:This menu item is used when the printer shares a line with a telephone9 is the factory default setting
Auto ReductionOnOffScales an incoming fax job so it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax sourceNote: On is the factory default setting.
Paper SourceAuto Size MatchTraySingle Sheet FeederMulti-Page FeederSpecifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an incoming faxNote: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
SidesOnOffEnables duplex (two-sided) printing for incoming fax jobsNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Fax FooterOnOffPrints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received faxNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Max Speed2400480096001440033600Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are receivedNote: 33600 (baud) is the factory default setting.
Block No Name FaxOnOffEnables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specifiedNote: Off is the factory default setting.

Fax Log Settings

Menu item Description
Transmission LogPrint logDo not print logPrint only for errorEnables printing of a transmission log after each fax jobNote: Print log is the factory default setting.
Receive Error LogPrint NeverPrint on ErrorEnables printing of a receive error log following a receive errorNote: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Auto Print LogsOnOffEnables automatic printing of fax logsNote: On is the factory default setting.
Log Paper SourceTraySelects the source of the paper used for printing logsNote: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Logs DisplayRemote Station NameDialed NumberSpecifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station nameNote: “Remote Station Name” is the factory default setting.
Enable Job LogOnOffEnables access to the Fax Job logNote: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Call LogOnOffEnables access to the Fax Call logNote: On is the factory default setting.

Speaker Settings

Menu item Description
Speaker ModeAlways OffOn until ConnectedAlways OnNotes:•Always Off turns the speaker off. “On until Connected” is the factory default setting. The speaker is on and issues a noise until the fax connection is made.•Always On turns the speaker on.
Speaker VolumeHighMediumLowControls the volume settingNote: High is the factory default setting.
Ringer VolumeOnOffControls the ringer volume for the fax speakerNote: On is the factory default setting.

Distinctive Rings

Menu item Description
Single RingOnOffAnswers calls with a one-ring patternNote: On is the factory default setting.
Double RingOnOffAnswers calls with a double-ring patternNote: On is the factory default setting.
Triple RingOnOffTriple Ring answers calls with a triple-ring patternNote: On is the factory default setting.

Flash Drive menu

Flash Drive menu

Menu item Description
Enable DriveEnableDisableEnables or disables the USB port on the front of the printerNotes:Certain options are not available on selected printer models.Enable is the factory default setting
Update CodeEnableDisableEnables or disables the ability of the printer to update its firmware code from a USB deviceNote: Enable is the factory default setting

Scan Settings

Menu item Description
FormatPDF (.pdf)TIFF (.tif)JPEG (.jpg)Specifies the format of the fileNote: PDF is the factory default setting.
PDF Version1.2–1.6Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to USBNote: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
ContentTextText/PhotoPhotographSpecifies the type of content that will be scanned to USBNotes:•Text is used when the document is mostly text.•Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art.•Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print.
ColorGrayColorSpecifies whether a job prints in grayscale or colorNote:Gray is the factory default setting.
Resolution75150200300400600Specifies how many dots per inch are scannedNote:150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness-4 to +4Lightens or darkens the outputNote:0 is the factory default setting.
OrientationPortraitLandscapeSpecifies the orientation of the scanned imageNote:Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementUniversal4 x 6 in.3 x 5 in.Business CardCustom Scan SizeA4A5Oficio (Mexico)A6JIS B5Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scannedNote:Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)OffLong edgeShort edgeSpecifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).
JPEG Quality Text or Text/ Photo5-90Sets the quality of a JPEG text or text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.Notes:75 is the factory default setting.5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
Photo JPEG Quality5-90Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the imageNotes:50 is the factory default setting.5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
Use Multi-Page TIFFOnOffProvides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to USB job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.Notes:On is the factory default setting.This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Scan bit Depth8 bit1 bitEnables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when Color is set to OffNote:8 bit is the factory default setting.
Background Removal-4 to +4Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copyNote:0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast0-5Best for contentSpecifies the contrast of the outputNote:"Best for content" is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail-4 to +4Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned imageNote:0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edgeOnOffSpecifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edgeNote:Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness1-5Adjusts the sharpness of a scanned imageNote:3 is the factory default setting.

Print Settings

Menu item Description
CopiesSpecifies the number of copies to printNote: 1 is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)2 sided1 sidedEnables duplex (two-sided) printingNote: 1 sided is the factory default setting.

Setup menu

Menu item Description
Printer LanguagePS EmulationPCL EmulationPPDS EmulationDetermines which printer language the print server uses to send data to the printerNote: PS is the factory default setting.
Print AreaNormalFit to PageWhole PageDetermines the print area on paperNote: Normal is the factory default setting.
Download TargetRAMFlashCollects permanent resources that have been downloaded on the printer and automatically writes them to the flash driveNote: RAM is the factory default setting.
Resource SaveOnOffSaves the permanently downloaded resourcesNote: Off is the factory default setting.

Finishing menu

Note: Certain options are not available on selected printer models.

Menu item Description
Sides2 Sided1 SidedSpecifies whether duplex (2-sided) printing is set as the default for all print jobsNote: 1 Sided is the factory default setting.
Duplex BindingLong EdgeShort EdgeDefines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the pageNotes:•Long Edge is the factory default setting.•Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait pages and the top edge of landscape pages.•Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait pages and the left edge of landscape pages.
Copies1–999Specifies a default number of copies for each print jobNote: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank PagesDo Not PrintPrintSpecifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print jobNote: “Do Not Print” is the factory default setting.
CollateOnOffStacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copiesNotes:Off is the factory default setting. No pages will be collated.The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.Both settings print the entire job the number of times specified by the Copy menu setting.
Separator SheetsNoneBetween CopiesBetween JobsBetween PagesSpecifies whether blank separator sheets are insertedNotes:None is the factory default setting.Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collation is set to On. If Collation is set to Off, a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's, all page 2's, and so on.Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages in a document for notes.
Separator SourceTrayMulti-Page FeederSpecifies the paper source for separator sheetsNote: Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
N-UpOff2 Up4 Up6 Up9 Up16 UpSpecifies that multiple-page images are printed on one side of a sheet of paperNotes:The number selected is the number of page images that will print per sideOff is the factory default setting.
N-Up OrderingHorizontalReverse HorizontalReverse VerticalVerticalSpecifies how the page images appear on the physical pageNote: Horizontal is the factory default setting.
OrientationAutoLandscapePortraitSpecifies the orientation of a multiple-page sheetNotes:Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.Long Edge uses landscape.Short Edge uses portrait.
N-Up BorderNoneSolidPrints a border around each page imageNote: None is the factory default setting.

Quality menu

Menu item Description
Color CorrectionAutoOffManualAdjusts the color output on the printed pageNotes:·Auto is the factory default setting. Auto applies different color conversion tables to each object on the printed page.·Off turns off color correction.·Manual allows customization of the color tables using the settings available from the Manual Color menu.·Due to the differences in additive and subtractive colors, certain colors that appear on computer monitors are impossible to duplicate on the printed page.
Print Resolution4800 CQ1200 dpiSpecifies the printed output resolutionNote: 4800 CQ is the factory default setting.
Toner Darkness1-5Lightens or darkens the printed outputNotes:·4 is the factory default setting.·Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enhance Fine LinesOnOffCreates smoother lines with sharper edgesNotes:·Off is the factory default setting.·This feature improves the printed output of CAD-type drawings (e.g. circuit diagrams, architectural prints, etc.).
Color SaverOnOffReduces the amount of toner used for graphics and images. The amount of toner used for text is not reduced.Notes:·Off is the factory default setting.·On overrides Toner Darkness settings.
RGB Brightness-6 to +6Adjusts brightness in color outputsNotes:·0 is the factory default setting.·This menu item does not affect files that use CMYK color specifications.
RGB Contrast0-5Adjusts contrast in color outputsNotes:0 is the factory default setting.This menu item does not affect files that use CMYK color specifications.
RGB Saturation0-5Adjusts saturation in color outputsNotes:0 is the factory default setting.This menu item does not affect files that use CMYK color specifications.
Color BalanceCyanMagentaYellowBlackReset DefaultsLets you make subtle color adjustments to the printer output by individually altering the amount of toner being used for each color plane. Specifies the amount of color from -5 to +5.Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color SamplessRGB DisplaysRGB VividDisplay—True BlackVividOff—RGBUS CMYKEuro CMYKVivid CMYKOff—CMYKPrints sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the printerNotes:Selecting any setting prints the sample.Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or CMYK combination that creates the color observed. These pages can be used to help decide which combinations to use to get the desired printed output.From a browser window, type the IP address of the printer to access a complete list of color sample pages from the Embedded Web Server.
Manual Color (RGB)RGB ImageRGB TextRGB GraphicsCustomizes the RGB color conversions. The values for each setting are:VividsRGB DisplayDisplay—True BlacksRGB VividOffNotes:Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter, more saturated colors.sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image. This applies a color conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer monitor.Display—True Black applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner for neutral gray colors.sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics. sRGB Vivid applies a color table that increases saturation. This is preferred for business graphics and text.Off turns off color conversion.
Manual Color (CMYK)CMYK ImageCMYK TextCMYK GraphicsCustomizes the CMYK color conversions. The values for each setting are:USCMYKEuroCMYKVivid CMYKOffNotes:USCMYK is the US factory default settingEuroCMYK is the International factory default settingVivid CMYK applies a color conversion table that produces brighter, more saturated colors.Off turns off color conversion.
Color AdjustInitiates an automatic color adjust calibration.

Utilities menu

Menu item Description
Hex TraceActivateAssists in isolating the source of a print job problemNotes:When Hex Trace is activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation, and control codes are not executed.To exit Hex Trace, turn the printer off.
Coverage EstimatorOffOnProvides an estimate of the percentage coverage of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black on a page. The estimate is printed on a separator page.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item is not available on selected printer models.

PDF menu

Menu item Description
Scale to FitNoYesScales page content to fit the selected page sizeNote: No is the factory default setting.
AnnotationsDo Not PrintPrintSpecifies whether to print annotations in the PDFNote: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

PostScript menu

Menu item Description
Print PS ErrorOnOffPrints a page containing the PostScript errorNote: Off is the factory default setting.
Image SmoothingOnOffEnhances the contrast and sharpness of low-resolution images and smooths their color transitionsNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in resolution.

PCL Emul menu

Menu item Description
Font SourceResidentDownloadAllSpecifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu itemNotes:•Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded into RAM.•Download shows all the fonts downloaded into RAM.•All shows all fonts available to any option.
Font NameRO CourierIdentifies a specific font and the option where it is storedNotes:•RO Courier is the factory default setting.•RO Courier shows the font name, font ID, and storage location in the printer. The font source abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, and D for Download.
Symbol Set10U PC-812U PC-850Specifies the symbol set for each font nameNotes:•10U PC-8 is the US factory default setting.•12U PC-850 is the international factory default setting.•A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation SettingsPoint Size1.00–1008.00Changes the point size for scalable typographic fontsNotes:•12 is the factory default setting.•Point Size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 1/72 of an inch.•Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25-point increments.
PCL Emulation SettingsPitch0.08–100Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fontsNotes:10 is the factory default setting.Pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters per inch (cpi).Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01-cpi increments.For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation SettingsOrientationPortraitLandscapeSpecifies the orientation of text and graphics on the pageNotes:Portrait is the factory default setting.Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
PCL Emulation SettingsLines per Page1–2556064Specifies the number of lines that print on each pageNotes:60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international factory default setting.The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation SettingsA4 Width198 mm203 mmSets the printer to print on A4-size paperNotes:198 mm is the factory default setting.The 203-mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10-pitch characters.
PCL Emulation SettingsAuto CR after LFOnOffSpecifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after a line feed (LF) control commandNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Setting alterations are duplicated in the PPDS menu.
PCL Emulation SettingsAuto LF after CROnOffSpecifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a carriage return (CR) control commandNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Setting alterations are duplicated in the PPDS menu.
Tray RenumberAssign MP FeederOffNone0–199Assign TrayOffNone0–199Assign Manual PaperOffNone0–199Assign Man EnvOffNone0–199Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feedersNotes:Off is the factory default setting.None is not an available selection. It is displayed only when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.None ignores the Select Paper Feed command.0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Tray RenumberView Factory DefNoneDisplays the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder
Tray RenumberRestore DefaultsYesNoReturns all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings

Image menu

Menu item Description
Auto FitOnOffSelects the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientationNotes:On is the factory default setting.The On setting overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images.
InvertOnOffInverts bi-tonal monochrome imagesNotes:Off is the factory default setting.The font size can be increased in 1-point increments.This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
ScalingAnchor Top LeftBest FitAnchor CenterFit Height/WidthFit HeightFit WidthScales the image to fit the selected paper sizeNote: Best Fit is the factory default setting.
OrientationPortraitLandscapeRev PortraitRev LandscapeSets the image orientationNote: Portrait is the factory default setting.

PictBridge menu

Menu item Description
Photo SizeAutoL2LHagaki PostcardCard Size100 x 150 mm4 x 6 in8 x 10 inLetterA4A5JIS B5Controls the printed size of each photo printed from a PictBridge-enabled deviceNotes:•Auto is the factory default setting.•If both the printer and the PictBridge-enabled camera have a value for this setting, the value in the camera supersedes the value in the printer.
LayoutAutoOff2 Up3 Up4 Up6 Up9 Up12 Up16 UpIndex PrintDetermines the maximum number of images that can print on one side of paperNotes:•Auto is the factory default setting.•If both the printer and the PictBridge-enabled camera have a value for this setting, the value in the camera supersedes the value in the printer.
QualityNormalDraftFineDetermines which resolution, toner darkness, and color saver values the device uses when printing photos sent from a PictBridge-enabled deviceNotes:Normal is the factory default setting.If both the printer and the PictBridge-enabled camera have a value for this setting, the value in the camera supersedes the value in the printer.
Paper SourceMP FeederTrayManual PaperIdentifies the printer default input source when printing photos from a PictBridge-enabled deviceNotes:MP Feeder is the factory default setting.A photo size larger than the size of the media installed in the printer input source cannot be selected.

Set Date and Time

Menu item Description
View Date/TimeDisplays the time in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM formatNote: This is a view only screen.
Set Date/TimeYesNoInstructs the printer to run the setup wizardNotes:Yes is the factory default setting.After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the Country/Region select screen, the default becomes No.
Time Zone (North, Central, and South America)Hawaii *AlaskaTijuana (PST)USA/Canada PSTUSA/Canada MSTUSA/Canada CSTUSA/Canada ESTCanada ASTCaracas (VET)Newfoundland (NST)Brasilia (BRT)Specifies the time zone for the faxNote:* indicates that this value does not have pre-programmed Daylight Savings Time Start and End times.
Time Zone (Europe and Africa)Azores (AZOT)Praia (CVT) *GMT (*)Dublin, IrelandLondon (BST)Western EuropeCentral EuropeEastern EuropeCairo (EET)Pretoria (SAST) *Moscow (MSK)Specifies the time zone for the faxNote:* indicates that this value does not have pre-programmed Daylight Savings Time Start and End times.
Time Zone (Asia)Jerusalem (IST)Abu Dhabi GIST)*Kabul (AFT) *Islamabad (PKT) *New Delhi (IST) *Kathmandu (NPT) *Astana (ALMT) *Yangon (MMT) *Bangkok (ICT) *Beijing (CST) *Seoul (KST) *Tokyo (JST) *Specifies the time zone for the faxNote:* indicates that this value does not have pre-programmed Daylight Savings Time Start and End times.
Time Zone (Australia and the Pacific region)Australia WSTAustralia CST Darwin (CST) *Australia ESTQueensland (EST) *Tasmania (EST)Wellington (NZST)Not ListedSpecifies the time zone for the faxNote:* indicates that this value does not have pre-programmed Daylight Savings Time Start and End times.
Observe DSTOnOffAccommodates Daylight Savings Time changesNote:On is the factory default setting.
Enable NTPOnOffLets the printer clock synchronize with the Network Time Protocol (NTP) serverNote:On is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer messages

List of status and error messages

Access USB after scan

A USB drive was inserted into the printer while the printer was scanning. From the keypad, press 1 to open the drive after scanning, or press 2 to ignore the USB drive.

Access USB now

A USB drive was inserted into the printer while the printer was setting up a job (copy, fax, e-mail, or FTP) or while in the menus. From the keypad, press 1 to release job resources and access the USB drive directly, or press 2 to ignore the USB drive and return to the job being set up.

Busy

Wait for the message to clear.

Calibrating

Wait for the message to clear.

Call complete

A fax call is completed. Wait for the message to clear.

Cancel not available

Wait for the message to clear.

Canceling

Wait for the message to clear.

Check Config ID

The printer configuration ID is invalid. Contact Customer Support.

Close door

Close the upper and lower doors.

Low

Replace the toner cartridge, and then wait for the message to clear.

Dialing

A fax number is dialed. If the number is too long to fit on the screen, only the word Dialing appears. Wait for the message to clear.

DO NOT TOUCH

The printer is receiving a code to update a file. Wait for the message to clear.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off or touch the printer while this message appears on the display.

Fax complete

A fax that was sent or received is complete. Wait for the message to clear.

Fax failed

The fax failed to be sent. Wait for the message to clear.

Flushing buffer

Wait for the message to clear.

File corrupt

A file with a valid extension is detected, but the actual file type does not match the extension, or the file is corrupt.

Hex Trace

The printer is in Hex Trace mode.

With Hex Trace selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation. This is used to help isolate the source of a print job problem.

Note: Control codes are not executed.

To exit Hex Trace, turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.

Imaging Kit

Replace the imaging kit, and then press to clear the message and continue printing.

Incoming call

This message appears when using manual fax mode. Press to print a black only fax or to print a color fax.

Insert Tray

Insert the specified tray into the printer.

Invalid Engine Code

The engine code is invalid. Contact Customer Support.

Invalid Network Code

The network code is invalid. Contact Customer Support.

LADP connection error

The LADP server information is present but the printer is unable to communicate with the server, or the communication ended before the return of the search results.

  • Wait for the message to clear and try searching for the address again.
  • Contact your system support person.

Line busy

A fax number is dialed, but the fax line is busy. Wait for the message to clear.

Load with

Try one or more of the following:

  • Load the paper tray or other source with the correct paper type and size.
  • Press, and then press to cancel printing.

Load single sheet feeder with

Try one or more of the following:

- Load the manual feeder with the correct paper type and size.

If no paper is in the manual feeder, load a sheet, and then press to clear the message and continue printing.

- Press to clear the message and continue printing.

The printer manually overrides the manual request, and then the job prints from an automatic source.

- Press, and then press to cancel printing.

- Define a name for each custom type (Custom 1–6) using the MarkVision utility. When the printer is prompting for one of the custom types, which has been named, then only the custom name is displayed.

Maintenance

The printer needs maintenance. Call for service.

Memory full, cannot send faxes

The printer fax memory is full. Press to clear the message and cancel the fax.

  • Reduce the fax resolution and try to send the fax again.
  • Reduce the number of pages in the fax and try to send the fax again.

The printer menus are disabled. The printer settings cannot be changed from the printer control panel. Contact your system support person for help.

Note: When menus are disabled, it is still possible to cancel a print job.

No analog phone line

The analog phone line was not detected; the fax is disabled. Connect the printer to an analog phone line.

No answer

A fax number is dialed, but no connection is made. Wait for the message to clear.

No dial tone

The printer does not have a dial tone. Wait for the message to clear.

No recognized file types

Either there are no files saved on the USB drive, or the files saved are not supported. Convert files to any of the following supported file types: .pdf, .gif, .jpeg, .jpg, .bmp, .png, .tiff, .tif, .pcx, or .dcx.

PC Kit Life Warning

This is the final warning message for the photoconductor kit. The photoconductor kit is near exhaustion. The printer continues printing unless the value for the Cartridge Alarm is changed from the printer control panel or set to On from the Supply Notifications Web page (located on the Embedded Web Server).

If the setting is On, then the printer stops printing. Press √ to select Continue. The printer continues to print until the photoconductor kit is completely exhausted. When the photoconductor kit is exhausted, replace it.

Phone in Use

The telephone attached to the printer is in use, or its handset is off the cradle.

1 Place the handset on the telephone cradle.
2 Press to send a black only fax or to send a color fax.
3 Enter the fax number.

Picture too large

The photo sent to the printer is larger than the current paper size. Press the arrow buttons until Closest photo size or Fit to page appears, and then press √.

Power Saver

The printer is saving power while it waits for the next print job.

  • Send a job to print.
  • Touch 📋 to warm the printer to normal operating temperature. Afterwards, Ready appears.

Printing error

A job sent from a USB drive was not successfully received. Wait for the message to clear and then try sending the job again.

Programming Code

The printer is receiving a file that is a code update. Wait for the message to clear.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn the printer off while this message appears on the display.

Reading data

A PictBridge enabled device is connected, and the printer is reading data from the device. Wait for the message to clear.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not remove the device or turn the printer power off while Reading data appears on the display.

Reading error (Remove drive)

The printer was reading information from a USB drive and encountered an error. The USB drive must be removed from the printer to clear the message.

Ready

The printer is ready to receive print jobs.

Receiving pXX

The printer is receiving a fax. pxx represents the number of pages received. Wait for the message to clear.

Reload printed pages in Tray

- Press √ to clear the message and continue processing the second side of the sheet.

- Press, and then press to cancel printing.

Remote Management Active

The printer is offline while it configures settings. Wait for the message to clear.

Remove originals from the scanner ADF

Remove the paper from the ADF to clear the message and continue printing.

Remove packaging material

Check for and remove any packaging materials from the toner cartridges.

Remove paper from standard output bin

Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.

Replace cartridge

Replace the toner cartridge, and then press √ to clear the message and continue printing.

Replace PC Kit

This is the early warning message for the photoconductor kit. The printer continues printing unless the value for the Cartridge Alarm is changed from the printer control panel or set to On from the Supply Notifications Web page (located on the Embedded Web Server).

If the setting is On, then the printer stops printing. Press √ to select Continue and continue printing.

When the PC Kit Life Warning appears, order a new photoconductor kit.

Scan Document Too Long

The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Press, and then press to cancel printing and clear the message.

Scan to USB failed

An attempt to create a file on the USB drive failed.

Try one or more of the following:

•Re-send the job.
- Reduce the scan resolution, and then try sending the job again.
- Remove the USB drive, reconnect it, and then try sending the job again.

Scanner ADF Cover Open

The ADF cover is open. The message clears when the cover is closed.

Sending pXX

The printer is sending a fax. pXX represents the number of pages received. Wait for the message to clear.

Standard Exit Bin Full

Empty the standard exit bin to clear the message and continue printing.

Tray Empty

Try one or more of the following:

  • Load the paper tray or other source with the correct paper type and size.
  • Press, and then press to cancel the current job.

Tray Low

Wait until the printer is not printing, and then load the paper tray or other source with the correct paper type and size.

Tray Missing

Insert the specified tray into the printer.

Unsupported USB device, please remove

Remove the unrecognized USB device.

Unsupported USB hub, please remove

Remove the unrecognized USB hub.

Unsupported Mode

Remove the camera, and then change the mode to PictBridge. Reconnect the camera.

USB drive disabled

A USB drive was inserted into the printer, and the port is disabled. Contact your system support person.

Use camera controls to print

A recognized PictBridge-compatible camera is attached to the printer.

Waiting

The printer has received data to print, but is waiting for an End-of-Job command, a Form Feed command, or additional data.

Try one or more of the following:

- Press to print the contents of the buffer.

- Cancel the current print job.

Waiting, too many events

Wait for the message to clear.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn the printer off while this message appears on the display.

30.yy cartridge missing

Insert the missing toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing.

31.yy Defective Cartridge

Replace the defective toner cartridge with a new one.

31 Defective Imaging Kit

Replace the imaging kit.

32.yy Replace Unsupported Cartridge

Replace the unsupported toner cartridge with a supported one.

34 Short paper

The printer paper size setting did not match the length of the paper that entered the printer.

Try one or more of the following:

  • Press to clear the message and continue printing.
  • Press, and then press to cancel printing.
  • Make sure the paper size setting matches the size of the paper in the tray.

35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature

The printer lacks sufficient memory to save settings. Install additional memory, or press √ to disable Resource Save and continue printing.

37 Insufficient memory to collate job

The printer prints the pages that were spooled prior to the collation message and collates the remainder of the print job.

Try one or more of the following:

  • Press to clear the message and continue printing.
  • Press, and then press to cancel printing.

38 Memory Full

The printer does not have enough memory available to continue printing. You cannot press because of this.

Try one or more of the following:

  • Press, and then press to cancel printing.
  • Simplify the print job by reducing the amount of text or graphics on a page and deleting unnecessary downloaded fonts or macros.
    •Install additional printer memory.

39 Complex page, some data may not have printed

The page is too complex to print. Press, and then press to cancel printing.

40 Invalid refill, change cartridge

Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.

50 PPDS Font Error

The printer has encountered a font error because a specific font may not be installed.

Try one or more of the following:

- Press √ to clear the message and continue printing.

- The printer cannot find the requested font. From the PPDS menu, select Best Fit, and then select On. The printer will find a similar font and reformat the affected text.

- Press, and then press to cancel printing.

51 Defective flash detected

Press to clear the message and continue printing.

52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources

Try one or more of the following:

  • Press to clear the message and continue printing.
  • Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.
  • Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory.
  • Press, and then press to cancel printing.

53 Unformatted flash detected

Try one or more of the following:

  • Press to clear the message and continue printing.
  • Format the flash memory. If the message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacing.

54 Network Software Error

The printer detects that a network port is installed, but cannot communicate with it. The printer disables all communication to the associated network interface.

Try one or more of the following:

  • Press to clear the message and continue printing.
  • Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
  • Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.

56 Standard USB Port Disabled

Try one or more of the following:

  • The printer discards any data received through the USB port. Press √ to clear the message and continue printing.
  • Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.

58 Too many flash options installed

Too many optional flash memory cards or too many optional firmware cards are installed on the printer.

Try one or more of the following:

- Press √ to clear the message and continue printing.

- Remove extra flash options:

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove extra flash options.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

58 Too many trays attached

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the additional trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

58 Input config error

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove and re-configure the additional trays.
Note: If you installed both the optional 550-sheet tray and the 650-sheet duo drawer, then the optional 550-sheet tray must be installed as the first tray (configuring from the bottom up).
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

59 Incompatible tray

Only options designed specifically for this printer are supported.

Try one or more of the following:

- Remove the specified tray.

- Press √ to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray.

82 Replace waste toner box

Replace the waste toner bottle. For more information, see "Replacing the waste toner bottle" on page 179.

82.yy Waste toner box missing

Replace the waste toner bottle, and then press to clear the message and continue printing.

88.yy Cartridge is low

Press √ to clear the message and continue printing.

88.yy Replace Cartridge

Replace the toner cartridge.

150 displayed

The USB drive contains more than 150 files; only 150 files will be displayed.

200.yy Paper jam

1 Clear the paper path.
2 Press √ to clear the message and continue printing.

201.yy Paper jam

1 Clear the paper path.
2 Remove the jammed paper below the fuser.
3 Press to clear the message and continue printing.

202.yy Paper jam

1 Clear the paper path.
2 Remove the jammed paper from the fuser.
3 Press to clear the message and continue printing.

230.yy Paper jam

1 Clear the paper path.
2 Open the front door, and then remove the jammed paper.
3 Close the front door.
4 Press to clear the message and continue printing.

Note: When there is more than one jam, the message displays the number of pages jammed.

235 Paper Jam Check Duplex

An unsupported paper size is jammed in the duplex unit.

1 Open the front door
2 Remove the jam.
3 Load the tray with the correct paper size.
4 Press to continue printing.

24x Paper Jam Check Tray

1 Pull the tray out.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
3 Insert the tray.

If all jams are cleared, the printer resumes printing.

Note: When there is more than one jam, the message indicates the number of pages jammed.

250.yy Paper jam

1 Clear the paper path.
2 Open the front door, and then remove the jammed paper.
3 Hold the fuser cover down, and then remove the jammed paper from inside the fuser.
4 Close the fuser cover, and then close the front door.
5 Press to clear the message and continue printing.

290–292 ADF Scanning Jams

The scanner failed to feed one or more pages through the ADF.

1 Remove all pages from the ADF.
Note: The message clears when the pages are removed from the ADF.
2 Flex and fan the pages.
3 Place the pages in the ADF.
4 Adjust the ADF guides.
5 From the printer control panel, press ◆ to start a black only job or 🔑 to start a color job.

293 Paper Missing

The scanner was instructed to scan using the ADF, but there is no paper in the ADF.

Note: The message clears when the pages are placed in the ADF.

1 Flex and fan the pages.
2 Place the pages in the ADF.
3 Adjust the ADF guides.
4 From the printer control panel, press ◆ to start a black only job or 📋 to start a color job.

293.02 Flatbed Cover Open

Close the scanner cover.

294 ADF Jam

This jam location may also be identified as 294.04 Duplex Sensor Off Jam, 294.05 Scan Sensor Off Jam, or 294.06 ADF Backfeed Jam. To clear this jam:

1 Remove all pages from the ADF.

Note: The message clears when the pages are removed from the ADF.

2 Flex and fan the pages.
3 Place the pages in the ADF.
4 Adjust the ADF guides.
5 From the printer control panel, press ◆ to start a black only job or 🏠 to start a color job.

840.01 Scanner Disabled

This message indicates that the scanner has been disabled by the system support person.

840.02 Scanner Auto Disabled

This message indicates the printer identified a problem with the scanner and automatically disabled it.

1 Remove all pages from the ADF.
2 Turn the printer off.
3 Wait 15 seconds and then turn the printer on.
4 Place the document in the ADF.
5 Press to start a black only job or to start a color job.

Note: If turning the printer off and then on again does not clear the message, contact your system support person.

940.01

Press down on the cyan toner cartridge to make sure it is installed properly. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on

941.01

Press down on the magenta toner cartridge to make sure it is installed properly. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

942.01

Press down on the yellow toner cartridge to make sure it is installed properly. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on

943.01

Press down on the black toner cartridge to make sure it is installed properly. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on

940.02

The cyan toner cartridge needs maintenance. Call for service.

941.02

The magenta toner cartridge needs maintenance. Call for service.

942.02

The yellow toner cartridge needs maintenance. Call for service.

943.02

The black toner cartridge needs maintenance. Call for service.

900–999 Service

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Check all cable connections.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

If the service message appears again, contact Customer Support, and report the message.

Maintaining the printer

Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.

Storing supplies

Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them.

Do not expose supplies to:

  • Direct sunlight
    •Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
    •High humidity above 80%
  • Salty air
    •Corrosive gases
    •Heavy dust

Checking the status of supplies

A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.

Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel

You can check the status of printer supplies by printing a menu settings page:

1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 From the printer control panel, press .
3 Press the arrow buttons until Reports appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Menu Settings Page appears, and then press √.

Checking the status of supplies from a network computer

Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Device Status. The Device Status page appears, displaying a summary of supply levels.

Ordering supplies

To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web Site at www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.

Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter- or A4-size plain paper.

Ordering toner cartridges

When 88 Cyan Cartridge Low, 88 Magenta Cartridge Low, 88 Yellow Cartridge Low, or 88 Black Cartridge low appears, order a new cartridge.

When 88 Replace Cyan Cartridge, 88 Replace Magenta Cartridge, 88 Replace Yellow Cartridge, or 88 Replace Black Cartridge appears, you must replace the specified toner cartridge.

Part name Part number C540, C543, and X543seriesC544, X544, and X546 series
Black Return Program Toner CartridgeC540A1KG
Cyan Return Program Toner CartridgeC540A1CG
Magenta Return Program Toner CartridgeC540A1MG
Yellow Return Program Toner CartridgeC540A1YG
Black High Yield Return Program Toner CartridgeC540H1KG
Cyan High Yield Return Program Toner CartridgeC540H1CG
Magenta High Yield Return Program Toner CartridgeC540H1MG
Yellow High Yield Return Program Toner CartridgeC540H1YG
Black High Yield Toner CartridgeC540H2KG
Cyan High Yield Toner CartridgeC540H2CG
Magenta High Yield Toner CartridgeC540H2MG
Yellow High Yield Toner CartridgeC540H2YG
Black Extra High Yield Return Program Toner CartridgeC544X1KG Not supported
Cyan Extra High Yield Return Program Toner CartridgeC544X1CG Not supported
Part name Part number C540, C543, and X543seriesC544, X544, and X546 series
Magenta Extra High Yield Return Program Toner CartridgeC544X1MG Not supported
Yellow Extra High Yield Return Program Toner CartridgeC544X1YG Not supported
Black Extra High Yield Toner CartridgeC544X2KG Not supported
Cyan Extra High Yield Toner CartridgeC544X2CG Not supported
Magenta Extra High Yield Toner CartridgeC544X2MG Not supported
Yellow Extra High Yield Toner CartridgeC544X2YG Not supported
Black Extra High Yield Return Program Toner CartridgeC546U1KG Not supported
Black Extra High Yield Toner CartridgeC546U2KG Not supported

Ordering imaging kits

When Replace black and color imaging kit or Replace black imaging kit appears, order a replacement imaging kit.

Part name Part number
Black and Color Imaging Kit C540X71G
Black Imaging Kit C540X74G

Ordering a waste toner bottle

When 82 Replace Waste Toner appears, order a replacement waste toner bottle. The waste toner bottle must be replaced when 82 Replace Waste Toner appears.

Part name Part number
Waste toner bottle C540X75G

Replacing supplies

Replacing the waste toner bottle

Replace the waste toner bottle when 82 Replace waste toner appears. The printer will not continue printing until the waste toner bottle is replaced.

1 Unpack the replacement waste toner bottle.

2 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing the waste toner bottle - 1

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing the waste toner bottle - 2

natural_image Illustration of a printer with red arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols)

3 Open the top door.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing the waste toner bottle - 3

natural_image Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing internal components and color-coded parts (no text or symbols)

4 Remove the right side cover.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing the waste toner bottle - 4

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove it.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing the waste toner bottle - 5

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing a component being inserted into a gear-like structure, with no visible text or symbols.

6 Place the waste toner bottle in the enclosed packaging.

7 Insert the new waste toner bottle.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing the waste toner bottle - 6

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing a gear and base with a magnified inset highlighting a specific component (no text or symbols present)

Maintaining the printer

8 Replace the right side cover.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing the waste toner bottle - 7

natural_image Diagram of a printer's internal structure with fan blades and mechanical components, showing no text or symbols

9 Close the top door.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing the waste toner bottle - 8

natural_image Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing internal components and color-coded parts (no text or symbols)

10 Close the front door.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing the waste toner bottle - 9

natural_image Illustration of a printer with red arrows indicating internal structure (no text or symbols)

Replacing a black imaging kit

Replace the black imaging kit when Replace Black Imaging Kit appears.

1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 1

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 2

natural_image Illustration of a printer with red arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols)

2 Open the top door.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 3

natural_image Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing internal components and color-coded parts (no text or symbols)

3 Remove the toner cartridges by lifting the handles, and then gently pulling away from the imaging kit.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 4

natural_image 3D printer image showing internal components with arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols)

4 Remove the right side cover.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 5

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove it.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 6

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing a component being processed with red arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols present)

Maintaining the printer

6 Lift the blue levers on the imaging kit, and then pull it toward you.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 7

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components and motion arrows (no text or symbols)

7 Press down on the blue levers, grasp the green handles on the sides, and then pull the imaging kit out.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 8

natural_image Close-up of a printer's internal structure with a magnified inset showing a red arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

8 Remove the yellow, cyan, and magenta developer units.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 9

natural_image Stacked cylindrical electronic components with red arrows indicating motion or force direction (no text or symbols)

9 Unpack the replacement black imaging kit.

Leave the packaging on the black developer unit.

10 Gently shake the black developer unit side to side.

11 Remove the red shipping cover from the black developer unit.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 10

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical component with red arrows indicating motion or force direction (no text or symbols)

12 Insert the black developer unit.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 11

natural_image 3D rendering of a mechanical assembly with layered rollers and a downward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

13 Replace the yellow, cyan, and magenta developer units.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 12

natural_image Stacked cylindrical electronic components with red arrows indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols visible)

Note: Make sure each developer unit is inserted into a matching color slot. 14 Place the used black imaging kit in the enclosed package.

15 Align and insert the imaging kit.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 13

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing a printer presser with color-coded components and red arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

16 Rotate the blue levers down until the imaging kit drops into place.

17 Replace the waste toner bottle.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 14

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing a robotic arm interacting with a gear-like component, with no visible text or symbols.

Maintaining the printer

18 Replace the right side cover.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 15

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical device with highlighted components and arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

19 Replace the toner cartridges.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 16

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical assembly with directional arrows and a magnified inset showing a green component (no text or symbols)

20 Close the top door.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 17

natural_image 3D illustration of a printer with internal components and color-coded motion arrows (no text or symbols)

Maintaining the printer

21 Close the front door.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black imaging kit - 18

natural_image Illustration of a printer with red arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols)

Replacing a black and color imaging kit

Replace the black and color imaging kit when Replace Color Imaging Kit appears.

1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 1

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 2

natural_image Illustration of a printer with red arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols)

2 Open the top door.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 3

natural_image Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing internal components and a magnified view of the printer's handle (no text or symbols present)

Maintaining the printer

3 Remove the toner cartridges by lifting the handles, and then gently pulling away from the imaging kit.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 4

natural_image 3D printer image showing internal components with arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols)

4 Remove the right side cover.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 5

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and remove it.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 6

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing a component being processed with red arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols present)

Maintaining the printer

6 Lift the blue levers on the imaging kit, and then pull it toward you.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 7

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components and motion arrows (no text or symbols)

7 Press down on the blue levers, grasp the green handles on the sides, and then pull the imaging kit out.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 8

natural_image Close-up of a printer's internal structure with a magnified inset showing a red arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

8 Unpack the replacement black and color imaging kit.

Leave the packaging on the developer units.

9 Gently shake the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units side to side.

10 Remove the red shipping cover from the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 9

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical component with red arrows indicating motion or force direction (no text or symbols)

Maintaining the printer

11 Insert the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 10

natural_image Stacked cylindrical electronic components with red arrows indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols)

12 Place the used black and color imaging kit in the enclosed package.

13 Align and insert the imaging kit.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 11

natural_image Illustration of hands handling a printer with color-coded slots, no text or symbols visible

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 12

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

14 Replace the waste toner bottle.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 13

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing a component with highlighted parts and a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

15 Replace the right side cover.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 14

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing a motor with fan blades and internal components, no text or symbols present

16 Replace the toner cartridges.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 15

natural_image Diagram of a vehicle's roof structure with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

Maintaining the printer

17 Close the top door.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 16

natural_image Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing internal components and color-coded parts (no text or symbols)

18 Close the front door.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a black and color imaging kit - 17

natural_image Illustration of a printer with red arrows indicating internal structure (no text or symbols)

Replacing a toner cartridge

Replace the specified toner cartridge (yellow, cyan, magenta, or black) when 88 Replace Cartridge appears. The printer will not continue printing until the specified cartridge is replaced.

Warning—Potential Damage: Damage caused by use of a non-Lexmark toner cartridge is not covered under warranty.

Note: Degraded print quality may result from using non-Lexmark toner cartridges.

1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready or 88 Replace Cartridge appears.
2 Unpack the new cartridge, and set it near the printer.

3 Open the top door.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a toner cartridge - 1

natural_image 3D illustration of a printer with internal structure and color-coded components, no visible text or symbols

4 Remove the toner cartridge by lifting the handle, and then gently pulling away from the imaging kit.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a toner cartridge - 2

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components with colored blocks and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

5 Align the new toner cartridge, and then press down until it is all the way into the slot.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a toner cartridge - 3

natural_image 3D mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components with colored blocks and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

6 Close the top door.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a toner cartridge - 4

natural_image 3D illustration of a printer with internal structure and color-coded components (no text or symbols)

Replacing a developer unit

Replace a developer unit when a print quality defect occurs or when damage occurs to the printer.

1 Grasp the front door at the side handholds, and then pull it toward you to open it.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 1

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 2

natural_image Illustration of a printer with red arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols)

2 Open the top door.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 3

natural_image Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing internal components and a magnified view of the printer's internal structure (no text or symbols present)

3 Remove the toner cartridges by lifting the handles and then gently pulling away from the imaging kit.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 4

natural_image Illustration of a printer's internal structure with arrows indicating process flow (no text or symbols)

Maintaining the printer

4 Remove the right side cover.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 5

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

5 Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove it.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 6

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing a motor and gear assembly with red arrows indicating motion or force direction (no text or symbols present)

6 Lift the blue levers on the imaging kit, and then pull it toward you.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 7

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components and motion arrows (no text or symbols)

Maintaining the printer

7 Press down on the blue levers, grasp the handles on the sides, and then pull the imaging kit out.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 8

natural_image Illustration of a printer's internal structure with arrows indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols present)

8 Remove the used developer unit.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 9

natural_image 3D rendering of a printer with color bands being inserted, showing an upward arrow (no text or symbols)

9 Place the used developer in the enclosed package.

10 Unpack the replacement developer unit.

Leave the packaging on the developer unit.

11 Gently shake the developer unit side to side.

12 Remove the red shipping cover from the developer unit.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 10

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical component with red arrows indicating motion or force direction (no text or symbols)

13 Insert the developer unit.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 11

natural_image Diagram of a printer's internal structure with color bands and a red arrow indicating compression (no text or symbols present)

14 Align and insert the imaging kit.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 12

natural_image Illustration of a printer's internal structure with color-coded bands, showing hands operating the part (no text or symbols visible)

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 13

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

15 Replace the waste toner bottle.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 14

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing a component with highlighted parts and a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

16 Replace the right side cover.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 15

natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing a motor with fan blades and internal components, no text or symbols present

17 Replace the toner cartridges.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 16

natural_image Diagram of a vehicle's roof structure with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

18 Close the top door.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 17

natural_image Illustration of a printer's internal structure showing internal components and color-coded parts (no text or symbols)

19 Close the front door.

LEXMARK X544dn - Replacing a developer unit - 18

natural_image Illustration of a printer with red arrows indicating internal processing or movement (no text or symbols present)

Cleaning the exterior of the printer

1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.

LEXMARK X544dn - Cleaning the exterior of the printer - 1

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.

2 Remove paper from the standard exit tray.

3 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of the printer.

4 Wipe only the outside of the printer, making sure to include the standard exit tray.

Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.

5 Make sure the standard exit tray is dry before beginning a new print job.

Cleaning the scanner glass

Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.

Note: Clean both areas of the scanner glass and both white underside areas.

1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.

2 Open the scanner cover.

LEXMARK X544dn - Cleaning the scanner glass - 1

text_image Diagram of a printer with numbered parts labeled 1 to 4, showing open lid and internal mechanism.
1White underside ADF cover
2White underside scanner glass cover
3Scanner glass
4ADF glass

3 Wipe the scanner glass until it is clean and dry.

4 Wipe the white underside of the scanner cover until it is clean and dry.

5 Close the scanner cover.

Moving the printer

Before moving the printer

LEXMARK X544dn - Before moving the printer - 1

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to move it safely.

LEXMARK X544dn - Before moving the printer - 2

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:

- Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

- Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.

- Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time.

Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.

Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.

Moving the printer to another location

The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:

  • Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer. Any cart used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options.
  • Keep the printer in an upright position.
  • Avoid severe jarring movements.

Shipping the printer

When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.

Administrative support

Finding advanced networking and administrator information

This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks. For more advanced system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.

Restoring the factory default settings

Menu settings marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the active settings. You can restore the original printer settings, often referred to as the factory default settings.

1 Make sure the printer is on and Ready appears.
2 From the printer control panel, press 🔊.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Settings appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until General Settings appears, and then press √.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Factory Defaults appears, and then press √.
6 Press the arrow buttons until Restore Now appears, and then press √.

Submitting changes appears briefly.

7 Press, and then press until Ready appears.

The following factory default settings are restored:

  • All downloaded resources in the printer memory are deleted. This includes fonts, macros, and symbol sets.
  • All settings return to the factory default settings except Printer Language in the Setup menu and custom settings in the Network and USB menus.

Using the Embedded Web Server

If the printer is installed on a network, the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions:

  • Configuring printer settings
  • Checking the status of the printer supplies
  • Configuring network settings
    •Viewing reports
    •Restoring the factory default settings
    •Viewing the virtual display
  • Setting Web page password protect
  • Setting Panel PIN protect
  • Setting the date and time

To access the Embedded Web Server:

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click one of the tabs to access information about the printer, change settings, or view a report.

Note: If the printer is connected to a computer by a USB or parallel cable, then open the Local Printer Settings Utility for Windows or Printer Settings for Macintosh to access printer menus.

Setting up e-mail alerts

You can have the printer send you an e-mail when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed, added, or unjammed.

To set up e-mail alerts:

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:

  • View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
  • Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Settings.

3 Under Other Settings, click E-mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items for notification and type in the e-mail addresses that you want to receive e-mail alerts.
5 Click Submit.

Note: See your system support person to set up the e-mail server.

Viewing reports

You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer, the network, and supplies.

To view reports from a network printer:

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can:

• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.

Troubleshooting

Solving basic printer problems

If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:

  • The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
  • The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
  • The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
  • Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
  • The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.
  • The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network device.
  • All options are properly installed.
    •The printer driver settings are correct.

Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on. This often fixes the problem.

Solving printing problems

Multiple-language PDFs do not print

The documents contain unavailable fonts.

1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
2 Click the printer icon.

The Print dialog appears.

3 Select Print as image.

4 Click OK.

Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds

The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.

If Performing Self Test and Ready do not appear, turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.

Error message about reading USB drive appears

Make sure the USB drive is supported. For information regarding tested and approved USB flash memory devices, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.

Jobs do not print

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT

Make sure Ready or Power Saver appears on the display before sending a job to print. Press √ to return the printer to the Ready state.

CHECK TO SEE IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL

Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin, and then press √

CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY

Load paper in the tray.

MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS CONNECTED TO THE NETWORK

Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected, check the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support person to make sure the network is functioning correctly.

Copies of the printer software are also available on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.

For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.

MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED

Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.

For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.

Job takes longer than expected to print

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB

Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.

CHANGE THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING TO OFF

1 From the printer control panel, press 📄.
2 Press the arrow buttons until Settings appears, and then press √.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Setup Menu appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Print Recovery appears, and then press √.

5 Press the arrow buttons until Page Protect appears, and then press √.

6 Press the arrow buttons until Off appears, and then press .

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING

Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.

Incorrect or strange characters print

  • The print job may not have terminated properly. Turn the printer off and back on.
  • Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode. If Ready Hex appears on the display, you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job. Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.

Tray linking does not work

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

Note: The paper trays, manual feeder, and multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper Size/Type menu.

LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER

  • Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.
  • Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.

USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS

  • Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.
  • If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.

Large jobs do not collate

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON

From the printer control panel Finishing menu, Print Properties, or the Print dialog, set Collate to On.

Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.

REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB

Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.

MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY

Add printer memory.

Unexpected page breaks occur

Increase the Print Timeout value:

1 From the printer control panel, press
2 Press the arrow buttons until Settings appears, and then press √.
3 Press the arrow buttons until General Settings appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Timeouts appears, and then press √.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Print Timeout appears, and then press √.
6 Press the arrow buttons until the desired value appears, and then press.

Solving copy problems

Copier does not respond

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES

Clear any error messages.

CHECK THE POWER

Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.

Scanner unit does not close

Make sure there are no obstructions:

1 Open the scanner cover.
2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
3 Close the scanner cover.

LEXMARK X544dn - Scanner unit does not close - 1

natural_image Two identical diagrams showing a printer with open lid and red arrows indicating process direction (no text or symbols)

Poor copy quality

These are some examples of poor copy quality:

  • Blank pages
  • Checkerboard pattern
    •Distorted graphics or pictures
  • Missing characters
  • Faded print
    •Dark print
  • Skewed lines
    •Smudges
    •Streaks
    •Unexpected characters
  • White lines in print

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES

Clear any error messages.

THE TONER MAY BE LOW

When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.

THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY

Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.

THE COPY IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARK

Adjust the copy darkness setting.

CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT

Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.

CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT

Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

UNWANTED TONER IS IN THE BACKGROUND

  • Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting.
  • Change the Background Removal setting in the Copy Settings menu.

PATTERNS (MOIRÉ) APPEAR IN THE OUTPUT

  • From the printer control panel, press the Content button until the light comes on next to Text/Photo or Photo.
  • Rotate the original document on the scanner glass.
  • From the printer control panel, press the Scale button and adjust the setting.

TEXT IS LIGHT OR DISAPPEARING

From the printer control panel, press the Content button until the light comes on next to Text or Text/Photo.

THE OUTPUT APPEARS WASHED OUT OR OVEREXPOSED

  • From the printer control panel, press the Content button until the light comes on next to Text/Photo or Photo.
  • From the printer control panel, press the Darkness button and change to a darker setting.

Partial document or photo copies

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT

Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING

Make sure the Paper Size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.

Solving scanner problems

Checking an unresponsive scanner

If your scanner is not responding, then make sure:

•The printer is turned on.
- The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network device.
- The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
- The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
- The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
- Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.

Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem with the scanner.

Scan was not successful

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS

Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.

AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM

Turn off and then restart the computer.

Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING

Close all programs not being used.

THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH

Select a lower scan resolution.

Poor scanned image quality

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES

Clear any error messages.

THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY

Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water. For more information, see "Cleaning the scanner glass" on page 202.

ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION

Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.

CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT

Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.

CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT

Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Partial document or photo scans

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT

Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING

Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
- For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.

Cannot scan from a computer

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES

Clear any error messages.

CHECK THE POWER

Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.

CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS

Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.

Solving fax problems

Caller ID is not shown

Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.

If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use.

Cannot send or receive a fax

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES

Clear any error messages.

CHECK THE POWER

Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.

CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS

Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:

•Telephone
-Handset
- Answering machine

CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK

1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.

REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST

The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.

  • If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN provider.
  • If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL provider.
  • If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.

CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE

  • Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly.
  • If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax.
  • If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.

TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT

To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.

CHECK FOR JAMS

Clear any jams, and then make sure that Ready appears.

TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING

Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.

VOICE MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION

Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice Mail and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.

THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL

1 Dial the fax number.
2 Scan the original document one page at a time.

Can send but not receive faxes

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY

Load paper in the tray.

CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS

The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone line rings before the printer answers. If you have extension phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then keep the Ring Delay setting at 4.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 In the Rings to Answer box, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before answering.
6 Click Submit.

THE TONER MAY BE LOW

88 toner low appears when the toner is low.

Can receive but not send faxes

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS IN FAX MODE

From the printer control panel, press the Fax button to put the printer in Fax mode.

MAKE SURE THE DOCUMENT IS LOADED PROPERLY

Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.

Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY

  • Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.
  • As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.

Received fax has poor print quality

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

RE-SEND THE DOCUMENT

Ask the person who sent you the fax to:

  • Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
  • Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.
  • Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.

THE TONER MAY BE LOW

When 88 toner low appears or when you experience faded print, replace the cartridge(s).

MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH

Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Configuration.
3 Click Fax Settings.

4 Click Analog Fax Setup.

5 In the Max Speed box, click on one of the following:

2400

4800

9600

14400

33600

6 Click Submit.

Blocking junk faxes

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Configuration.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 Click the No Name Fax option.

This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.

6 In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to block.

Solving option problems

Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

RESET THE PRINTER

Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.

CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the printer.
3 Check the connection between the option and the printer.

MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY

Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not listed, then reinstall it. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option, or go to www.lexmark.com/publications to view the option instruction sheet.

MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED

From the computer you are printing from, select the option. For more information, see "Updating available options in the printer driver" on page 35.

Drawers

MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY

1 Open the paper tray.
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
3 Make sure paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly.
5 Close the door.

RESET THE PRINTER

Turn the printer off. Wait 10 seconds. Turn the printer back on.

Multipurpose feeder

CHECK THE MULTIPURPOSE FEEDER

Make sure the 650-sheet duo drawer (multipurpose feeder) is installed properly.

CLEAR ANY JAMS

Clear any jams in the multipurpose feeder.

CHECK THE POWER CORD CONNECTION

Make sure:

  • The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
    •The outlet has power.

CHECK THE PAPER

Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty media guidelines.

CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES

Move the guides in the tray to the correct position for the size loaded.

CHECK FOR SERVICE MESSAGES

If a service message appears, turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on. If the error recurs, call for service.

Memory card

Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.

Solving paper feed problems

Paper frequently jams

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER

Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty media guidelines.

MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY

Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the multipurpose feeder.

CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES

Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY

  • Load paper from a fresh package.
  • Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared

The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then press √.

Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam

In the Setup menu, Jam Recovery is set to Off. Set Jam Recovery to Auto or On:

1 Press

LEXMARK X544dn - Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam - 1

2 Press the arrow buttons until Settings appears, and then press √.
3 Press the arrow buttons until General settings appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Print Recovery appears, and then press √.

5 Press the arrow buttons until Jam Recovery appears, and then press √.
6 Press the arrow buttons until On or Auto appears, and then press √.

Solving print quality problems

The information in the following topics may help you solve print quality problems. If these suggestions still do not correct the problem, contact Customer Support. You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement.

Blank pages

LEXMARK X544dn - Blank pages - 1

natural_image Blank white document page with a corner bookmark (no text or symbols)

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

PACKING MATERIAL MAY BE ON THE PRINT CARTRIDGE

Remove the print cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the print cartridge.

THE TONER MAY BE LOW

When 88 Cartridge low appears, order a new print cartridge.

If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.

Characters have jagged or uneven edges

LEXMARK X544dn - Characters have jagged or uneven edges - 1

text_image ABC DEF

If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the software program.

Clipped images

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE GUIDES

Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING

Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
- For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.

Dark lines

LEXMARK X544dn - Dark lines - 1

text_image ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

The imaging kit may be defective.

If Black and color imaging kit life warning or Black imaging kit life warning appears, replace the imaging kit.

Gray background

LEXMARK X544dn - Gray background - 1

text_image ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

CHECK THE TONER DARKNESS SETTING

Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting:

  • From the printer control panel, change the setting from the Quality menu.
  • For Windows users, change the setting from Print Properties.
  • For Macintosh users, change the setting from the Print dialog.

Incorrect margins

LEXMARK X544dn - Incorrect margins - 1

text_image ABC DEF

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES

Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING

Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:

  • For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
  • For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.

Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line

LEXMARK X544dn - Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line - 1

text_image ABCDE ABCDE

LEXMARK X544dn - Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line - 2

text_image AIDE AIDE AIDE

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

A TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE

Replace the defective toner cartridge.

THE IMAGING KIT MAY BE DEFECTIVE

Replace the imaging kit.

Note: The printer has two types of imaging kits: a black and color imaging kit, and a black imaging kit. The black and color imaging kit contains cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. The black imaging kit contains black only.

Paper curl

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING

Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.

HAS THE PAPER ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY?

  • Load paper from a fresh package.
  • Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

LEXMARK X544dn - Print irregularities - 1

text_image ABCDE ABCE ABCDE

LEXMARK X544dn - Print irregularities - 2

natural_image Generic document icon with geometric shapes (triangle, square, crescent) and a document corner, no text or symbols present.

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY

  • Load paper from a fresh package.
  • Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING

Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
- For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.

CHECK THE PAPER

Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.

THE TONER MAY BE LOW

When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the print becomes faded, replace the print cartridge.

THE FUSER MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE

Replace the fuser.

Repeating defects

LEXMARK X544dn - Repeating defects - 1

natural_image Two stylized document icons with simple face expressions, one pink and gray, the other yellow and blue (no text or symbols)

REPEATING MARKS OCCUR MULTIPLE TIMES ON A PAGE

Print the Print defects guide and match the defects to the marks on one of the vertical lines. Follow the instructions on the Print defects guide to determine the cause of the repeating defects.

Skewed print

CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES

Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

CHECK THE PAPER

Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.

LEXMARK X544dn - Print is too light - 1

text_image ABC DEF

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CALIBRATE THE COLOR

The printer automatically calibrates the colors whenever a new imaging kit is detected. If a cartridge is replaced, then you can calibrate the colors manually:

1 From the printer control panel, press
2 From the Admin menu, press the arrow buttons until Settings appears, and then press √.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Print menu appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Quality menu appears, and then press √.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Color Adjust appears, and then press √.
Calibrating appears.

CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS

The Toner Darkness setting is too light, the RGB Brightness setting is too light, or the RGB Contrast setting is too low.

1 From the printer control panel, press
2 From the Admin menu, press the arrow buttons until Settings appears, and then press √.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Print menu appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Quality menu appears, and then press √.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Toner Darkness, RGB Brightness, or RGB Contrast appears, and then press √
6 Change the selected setting to a lower value, and then press √.

THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY

  • Load paper from a fresh package.
  • Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

CHECK THE PAPER

Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING

Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.

MAKE SURE COLOR SAVER IS SET TO OFF

Color Saver may be set to On.

A TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE LOW

When 88 Cartridge Low appears, order a new cartridge.

A TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE

Replace the toner cartridge.

THE IMAGING KIT MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE

Replace the imaging kit.

Note: The printer has two types of imaging kits: a black and color imaging kit, and a black imaging kit. The black and color imaging kit contains cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. The black imaging kit contains black only.

LEXMARK X544dn - Print is too dark - 1

text_image ABC DEF

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CALIBRATE THE COLOR

The printer automatically calibrates the colors whenever a new imaging kit is detected. If a cartridge is replaced, then you can calibrate the colors manually:

1 From the printer control panel, press
2 From the Admin menu, press the arrow buttons until Settings appears, and then press √.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Print menu appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Quality menu appears, and then press √.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Color Adjust appears, and then press √. Calibrating appears.

CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS

The Toner Darkness setting is too dark, the RGB Brightness setting is too dark, or the RGB Contrast setting is too high.

1 From the printer control panel, press 📄.
2 From the Admin menu, press the arrow buttons until Settings appears, and then press √.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Print menu appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Quality menu appears, and then press √.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Toner Darkness, RGB Brightness, or RGB Contrast appears, and then press
6 Change the selected setting to a lower value, and then press √

A TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE

Replace the toner cartridge.

Solid color pages

LEXMARK X544dn - Solid color pages - 1

natural_image Simple graphic of a document with a white top and black bottom (no text or symbols)

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED

Remove the print cartridge and shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner, and then reinstall it.

THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE OR LOW ON TONER

Replace the used print cartridge with a new one. If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.

Toner fog or background shading appears on the page

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

THE IMAGING KIT MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE

Replace the imaging kit.

Note: The printer has two types of imaging kits: a black and color imaging kit, and a black imaging kit. The black and color imaging kit contains cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. The black imaging kit contains black only.

Is there toner in the paper path?

Contact Customer Support.

Toner rubs off

LEXMARK X544dn - Toner rubs off - 1

text_image ABC DEF

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING

Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
- For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.

CHECK THE PAPER TEXTURE SETTING

From the printer control panel Paper menu, make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.

Toner specks

LEXMARK X544dn - Toner specks - 1

text_image ABC DEF

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE

Replace the print cartridge.

THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH

Contact Customer Support.

Transparency print quality is poor

Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES

Use only transparencies recommended by the printer manufacturer.

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING

Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
- For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.

Uneven print density

LEXMARK X544dn - Uneven print density - 1

text_image ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

Replace the black and color imaging kit.

Solving color quality problems

This section helps answer some basic color-related questions and describes how some of the features provided in the Quality menu can be used to solve typical color problems.

Color misregistration

LEXMARK X544dn - Color misregistration - 1

text_image ABCDE ABCDE

Color has shifted outside of the appropriate area or has been superimposed over another color area. These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

A TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE

Remove and reinstall the toner cartridges.

CALIBRATE THE COLOR

The printer will automatically calibrate the colors whenever a new imaging kit is detected. If a toner cartridge is replaced, a manual alignment will need to be performed.

1 From the printer control panel, press
2 From the Admin menu, press the arrow buttons until Settings appears, and then press √.
3 Press the arrow buttons until Print menu appears, and then press √.
4 Press the arrow buttons until Quality menu appears, and then press √.
5 Press the arrow buttons until Color Adjust appears, and then press √.

Calibrating appears.

FAQ about color printing

What is RGB color?

Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer monitors create colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue needed to produce a certain color.

What is CMYK color?

Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing presses, inkjet printers, and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.

How is color specified in a document to be printed?

Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they allow users to modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the software program Help topics.

How does the printer know what color to print?

When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer. The color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the desired color. The object information determines the application of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.

Should I use PostScript or PCL emulation printer software? What settings should I use for the best color?

The PostScript driver is strongly recommended for best color quality. The default settings in the PostScript driver provide the preferred color quality for the majority of printouts.

Why doesn't the printed color match the color I see on the computer screen?

The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors, there are many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions. For recommendations on how the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color-matching problems, see the question, "How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?"

The printed page appears tinted. Can I adjust the color?

Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted (for example, everything printed seems to be too red). This can be caused by environmental conditions, paper type, lighting conditions, or user preference. In these instances, adjust the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color. Color Balance provides the user with the ability to make subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane. Selecting positive or negative values for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (from the Color Balance menu) will slightly increase or decrease the amount of toner used for the chosen color. For example, if a printed page has a red tint, then decreasing both magenta and yellow could potentially improve the color balance.

My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected. Is there anything I can do to improve the color?

This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended. If a reflective projector must be used, then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1, 2, or 3 will lighten the transparency. Make sure to print on the recommended type of color transparencies.

What is manual color correction?

When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user-selected color conversion tables to process objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no user-defined color conversion will be implemented. Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations).

Notes:

  • Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations. It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating system controls the adjustment of colors.
  • The color conversion tables—applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto—generate preferred colors for the majority of documents.

To manually apply a different color conversion table:

1 From the Quality menu, select Color Correction, and then select Manual.
2 From the Quality menu, select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the affected object type.

Manual Color menu

Object type Color conversion tables
RGB ImageRGB TextRGB GraphicsVivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be applied to all incoming color formats.sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor. Black toner usage is optimized for printing photographs.Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor. Uses only black toner to create all levels of neutral gray.sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB Display color correction. Black usage is optimized for printing business graphics.Off—No color correction is implemented.
CMYK ImageCMYK TextCMYK Graphics•US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP (Specifications for Web Offset Publishing) color output.•Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximated EuroScale color output.•Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color correction setting.•Off—No color correction is implemented.

From the printer Quality menu, nine types of Color Samples sets are available. These are also available from the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates a multiple-page printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box, depending on the table selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table.

By examining Color Samples sets, a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color. The color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program. For more information, see the software program Help topics. Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the selected color conversion table for the particular object.

Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color-matching problem depends on the Color Correction setting being used (Auto, Off, or Manual), the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations). When the printer Color Correction setting is set to Off, the color is based on the print job information; and no color conversion is implemented.

Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management. The resulting printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.

What are detailed Color Samples and how do I access them?

Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer. A detailed Color Samples set contains a range of shades (displayed as colored boxes) that are similar to a user-defined RGB or CMYK value. The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK Increment box.

To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server:

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.

Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Configuration.

3 Click Color Samples.

4 Click Detailed Options to narrow the set to one color range.

5 When the Detailed Options page appears, select a color conversion table.

6 Enter the RGB or CMYK color number.

7 Enter an Increment value from 1–255.

Note: The closer the value is to 1, the narrower the color sample range will appear.

8 Click Print to print the detailed Color Samples set.

Embedded Web Server does not open

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTIONS

Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.

CHECK THE NETWORK SETTINGS

Depending on the network settings, you may need to type https://instead of http:// before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, see your system administrator.

Contacting Customer Support

When you call Customer Support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.

You need to know your printer model, type, and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.

In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries/regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.

Notices

Product information

Product name:

Lexmark X543, X544, X544n, X544dn, X544dw, X544dtn, X546dtn

Machine type:

7525,4989

Model(s):

131, 133, 138, 332, 333, 336, 337, 352, 356, 382, 383, 386, 387, 392, 393, 396, 397

Edition notice

August 2009

The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time.

References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user's responsibility.

For Lexmark technical support, visit support.lexmark.com.

For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.

If you don't have access to the Internet, you can contact Lexmark by mail:

Lexmark International, Inc.

Bldg 004-2/CSC

740 New Circle Road NW

Lexington, KY 40550

USA

© 2009 Lexmark International, Inc.

All rights reserved.

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS

This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense.

Trademarks

Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries.

ScanBack is a trademark of Lexmark International, Inc.

PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company's designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation

The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.

The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations.

Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:

Director of Lexmark Technology & Services

Lexmark International, Inc.

740 West New Circle Road

Lexington, KY 40550

(859) 232-3000

Modular component notice

Wireless-equipped models contain the following modular component(s):

Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model LEX-M04-001, FCC ID: IYLLEXM04001; IC:2376A-M04001

Noise emission levels

The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing 48 dBA
Ready 32 dBA

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive

LEXMARK X544dn - Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive - 1

text_image Prohibition sign for a trash bin with red X marks and black base, indicating no waste or plastic discharge.

The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products. If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local sales office phone number.

Static sensitivity notice

LEXMARK X544dn - Static sensitivity notice - 1

This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer.

ENERGY STAR

Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.

LEXMARK X544dn - ENERGY STAR - 1

Mercury statement

This product contains mercury in the lamp (<5mg Hg). Disposal of mercury may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org.

Temperature information

Ambient temperature 15.6C^ - 32.2C^
Shipping and storage temperature -40.0C^ - 60.0C^

Laser notice

The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.

Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.

Laser advisory label

A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:

LEXMARK X544dn - Laser advisory label - 1

text_image DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam. Perigo - Emissione invisivel de laser quando os cartuchos sąo removidos e a trava aberta. Evite exposição ao feixe. Opasnost - Nevidjärve laserinko zračenje kade su kasela uklomjene i ponštěna sigurnosna vaza. Iztajperavat izlaganje zradina. Pozor: Nebuzpedi výsikytu neviditelného laserového zálení pri ododněrněl kassel a odblikovskní pejelky. Navystavujde se paproskům. Fare - Ueyngl laserstrállog, når tonerkassetterne fjørnes og afklánion ophueves. Undigk at komme i kontakt med strälen. Pas opl - Onchodtbare laserstrállog ve cartridges worden verwijderd en vergrendeling open is. Vorkom blottoftning an de stralen. Danger - Radiations invisibles los du retrait des cartouches et du déveroullage des loquarts. Eviter toute exposition su rayon laser. Visara - Näkymätöntá laserstälbyš on varottava, kun värikasetett on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Võrtä sitteffle altstumista. Gefahr - Onschittbare laserstrállog beim Hieraunnahmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperne. Laserstrahl meidení Kivilong - Adapt omnedolke klóju insu opapivirna ovakzinsu va slajtristruktorni niubopadlas. Anelyjvres tryv indiret som štūntry suv activa. Figyvelm/ A kasertak kivitelekur lathetatlan lézersugärzin lephet fel, ha a biotonsigi kapcsulo nem moküdk. Kerüljük el a lezenugent. Pericola - Emissione di radiazioni laser durante la rimazione delle addus e dal blocco. Evitate l'exposizione al raggi Fare - Ueynlig laserstrállog når kassetter tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unimga eksponering. Nebezpraczehmeto - niewedorzne promensowarne lesenowe po wyjksju kasely i nylyplazemiu blokady. Unlikat ekspozycji na wątkie Orcachol / Pio centiva képartipuski i nágrupaner finicazen verekupere irányi nakuprave korzyvaneet. Utberalina oszaskrchrane myva Pozor - Nebuzpedanobu neviditelného laserového zánenia pri odkrajnej kosznić ch a odblikovansje poldeke. Nevystavuje sa tõžom Pelgno: Se produzim nadaizones laser invisibles el entrar van cartuches con el interloqueo deactivado. Evite la exposizione al haz de laser. Vörning - Osynlig laserstrállog når kassetterna är borttagna och spårven avaktiverad. Undvik att utsütta dig för strålen. 克隆 - 当投影金奥取出直且硕失去作面时有者不见的激光辐射。请把光幕赢在激光光束下。 克隆 - 部降假粉泥與安全建議問問失效時會產生若干見的密封輻射。避難免曝露在雷射光电下。 危険: カートリッジが取外され。内置ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射します。光錦に当らないようにして下さい。

Power consumption

Product power consumption

The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.

Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)
Printing The product is generating hard-copy output from electronic inputs. 540 W
Copying The product is generating hard-copy output from hard-copy original documents.510 W
Scanning The product is scanning hard-copy documents. 60 W
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 50 W
Power Saver The product is in energy-saving mode. 24 W
Off The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch is turned off.0 W

The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Power Saver

This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Power Saver. The Power Saver Mode is equivalent to the Sleep Mode. The Power Saver Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of

inactivity. The Power Saver Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Power Saver Timeout.

Factory default Power Saver Timeout for this product (in minutes): 110V = 45 minutes, 220V = 60 minutes

By using the configuration menus, the Power Saver Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes. Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product. Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.

Off mode

If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet.

Total energy usage

It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.

Industry Canada compliance statement

This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard ICES-003.

Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone company.

This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.

A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises' wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your setup documentation for more information.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format

US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.

If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.

The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.

If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc. at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.

This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.

Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information.

If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.

Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)

See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.

Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network

This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.

Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in

the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.

This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.

Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network

The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services.

This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.

This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.

This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers.

Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom's specifications:

  • There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and
  • The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt.
  • The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.

South Africa telecommunications notice

This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to the PSTN.

Using this product in Switzerland

This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The Lexmark filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland.

Notice to Users in the European Union

Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

LEXMARK X544dn - Notice to Users in the European Union - 1

A declaration of conformity with the requirements of the directives is available from the Director of Manufacturing and Technical Support, Lexmark International, S. A., Boigny, France.

Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.

Notices

Regulatory notices for wireless products

This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters, for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.

Exposure to radio frequency radiation

The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.

Industry Canada (Canada)

This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada.

To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.

The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.

The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

Industry Canada (Canada)

Notice to users in the European Union

Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

LEXMARK X544dn - Notice to users in the European Union - 1

A declaration of conformity with the requirements of the directives is available from the Director of Manufacturing and Technical Support, Lexmark International, S. A., Boigny, France. Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.

Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.

Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

LEXMARK X544dn - Notice to users in the European Union - 2

Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.

A declaration of conformity with the requirements of the directives is available from the Director of Manufacturing and Technical Support, Lexmark International, S. A., Boigny, France. Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.

ČeskySpolečnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η ΣΧΜΑΡΚ ΙΝΤΕΝΝΑΤΙΟΛ, ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
SuomiLexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français Parla présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Magyar Alulrot, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetö követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb előírásainak.
Íslenska Hérmeð lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Conla presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Aršo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti Bil-preženti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
NederlandsHierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
NorskLexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português ALexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

Statement of Limited Warranty

Lexmark X543, X544, X544n, X544dn, X544dw, X544dtn, X546dtn

Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY

This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-specific warranty information that came with your product.

This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as "Remarketer."

Limited warranty

Lexmark warrants that this product:

—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship

If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).

If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the product.

If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user.

Limited warranty service

The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed.

To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location. You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.

When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.

The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.

Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.

Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).

For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web at www.lexmark.com/support.

Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.

Extent of limited warranty

Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product.

Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:

—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user's guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment

—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark

TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.

Limitation of liability

Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.

Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.

This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.

Additional rights

Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.

This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

DEVICE PATENT LICENSE

Lexmark reserves the right to discontinue selling these toner cartridges any time after it discontinues service support for this printer.

IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ BEFORE OPENING: Opening this package, installing the printing device software, or using the products inside confirms your acceptance of the following licenses/agreements:

License: The patented printer inside is licensed for, and designed to work with only genuine Lexmark toner cartridges and developer components for the life of the patented printer. You agree to: (1) use only genuine Lexmark toner cartridges and developer components with this printer except as otherwise provided below, and (2) pass this license/agreement to any subsequent user of this printer. The patented Lexmark toner cartridges and developer components inside are licensed subject to a restriction that they may be used only once. Following their initial use,

you agree to return them only to Lexmark for recycling. Lexmark toner cartridges are designed to stop working after delivering a fixed amount of toner. A variable amount of toner may remain in them when replacement is required.

If you do not accept these terms, return the unopened package to your point of purchase. Replacement toner cartridge(s) sold without these terms are available through www.lexmark.com, may be refilled by you, or a third party, as the only cartridge alternative to be used with the licensed printer.

LEXMARK SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT: BY USING THIS PRODUCT, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRODUCT UNUSED AND REQUEST A REFUND OF THE AMOUNT YOU PAID. IF YOU ARE INSTALLING THIS PRODUCT FOR USE BY OTHER PARTIES, YOU AGREE TO INFORM THE USERS THAT USE OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS.

LEXMARK SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

This License Agreement ("Software License Agreement") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Lexmark International, Inc. ("Lexmark") that, to the extent your Lexmark product or Software Program is not otherwise subject to a written software license agreement between you and Lexmark or its suppliers, governs your use of any Software Program installed on or provided by Lexmark for use in connection with your Lexmark product. The term "Software Program" includes machine-readable instructions, audio/visual content (such as images and recordings), and associated media, printed materials and electronic documentation, whether incorporated into, distributed with or for use with your Lexmark product.

1 STATEMENT OF SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY. Lexmark warrants that the media (e.g., diskette or compact disk) on which the Software Program (if any) is furnished is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period. The warranty period is ninety (90) days and commences on the date the Software Program is delivered to the original end-user. This limited warranty applies only to Software Program media purchased new from Lexmark or an Authorized Lexmark Reseller or Distributor. Lexmark will replace the Software Program should it be determined that the media does not conform to this limited warranty.

2 DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF WARRANTIES. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, LEXMARK AND ITS SUPPLIERS PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM "AS IS" AND HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ABSENCE OF VIRUSES, ALL WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM. TO THE EXTENT LEXMARK CANNOT BY LAW DISCLAIM ANY COMPONENT OF THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, LEXMARK LIMITS THE DURATION OF SUCH WARRANTIES TO THE 90-DAY TERM OF THE EXPRESS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY.

This Agreement is to be read in conjunction with certain statutory provisions, as that may be in force from time to time, that imply warranties or conditions or impose obligations on Lexmark that cannot be excluded or modified. If any such provisions apply, then to the extent Lexmark is able, Lexmark hereby limits its liability for breach of those provisions to one of the following: providing you a replacement copy of the Software Program or reimbursement of the price paid for the Software Program.

The Software Program may include internet links to other software applications and/or internet web pages hosted and operated by third parties unaffiliated with Lexmark. You acknowledge and agree that Lexmark is not responsible in any way for the hosting, performance, operation, maintenance, or content of, such software applications and/or internet web pages.

3 LIMITATION OF REMEDY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY AND ALL LIABILITY OF LEXMARK UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE GREATER OF THE PRICE

PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM AND FIVE U.S. DOLLARS (OR THE EQUIVALENT IN LOCAL CURRENCY). YOUR SOLE REMEDY AGAINST LEXMARK IN ANY DISPUTE UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE TO SEEK TO RECOVER ONE OF THESE AMOUNTS, UPON PAYMENT OF WHICH LEXMARK SHALL BE RELEASED AND DISCHARGED OF ALL FURTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITY TO YOU.

IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK, ITS SUPPLIERS, SUBSIDIARIES, OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES, LOST SAVINGS, INTERRUPTION OF USE OR ANY LOSS OF, INACCURACY IN, OR DAMAGE TO, DATA OR RECORDS, FOR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, OR DAMAGE TO REAL OR TANGIBLE PROPERTY, FOR LOSS OF PRIVACY ARISING OUT OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM, OR OTHERWISE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT), REGARDLESS OF THE NATURE OF THE CLAIM, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY), AND EVEN IF LEXMARK, OR ITS SUPPLIERS, AFFILIATES, OR REMARKETERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU BASED ON A THIRD-PARTY CLAIM, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THIS EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES IS DETERMINED LEGALLY INVALID. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE-STATED REMEDIES FAIL OF THEIR ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

4 U.S.A. STATE LAWS. This Software Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or the exclusion of limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.

5 LICENSE GRANT. Lexmark grants you the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this License Agreement:

a Use. You may Use one (1) copy of the Software Program. The term "Use" means storing, loading, installing, executing, or displaying the Software Program. If Lexmark has licensed the Software Program to you for concurrent use, you must limit the number of authorized users to the number specified in your agreement with Lexmark. You may not separate the components of the Software Program for use on more than one computer. You agree that you will not Use the Software Program, in whole or in part, in any manner that has the effect of overriding, modifying, eliminating, obscuring, altering or de-emphasizing the visual appearance of any trademark, trade name, trade dress or intellectual property notice that appears on any computer display screens normally generated by, or as a result of, the Software Program.
b Copying. You may make one (1) copy of the Software Program solely for purposes of backup, archiving, or installation, provided the copy contains all of the original Software Program's proprietary notices. You may not copy the Software Program to any public or distributed network.
c Reservation of Rights. The Software Program, including all fonts, is copyrighted and owned by Lexmark International, Inc. and/or its suppliers. Lexmark reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this License Agreement.
d Freeware. Notwithstanding the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, all or any portion of the Software Program that constitutes software provided under public license by third parties ("Freeware") is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the software license agreement accompanying such Freeware, whether in the form of a discrete agreement, shrink-wrap license, or electronic license terms at the time of download. Use of the Freeware by you shall be governed entirely by the terms and conditions of such license.

6 TRANSFER. You may transfer the Software Program to another end-user. Any transfer must include all software components, media, printed materials, and this License Agreement and you may not retain copies of the Software Program or components thereof. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end-user receiving the transferred Software Program must agree to all these License Agreement terms. Upon transfer of the Software Program, your license is automatically terminated. You may not rent, sublicense, or assign the Software Program except to the extent provided in this License Agreement, and any attempt to do so shall be void.

7 UPGRADES. To Use a Software Program identified as an upgrade, you must first be licensed to the original Software Program identified by Lexmark as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the original Software Program that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility.
8 LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not alter, decrypt, reverse engineer, reverse assemble, reverse compile or otherwise translate the Software Program, except as and to the extent expressly permitted to do so by applicable law for the purposes of inter-operability, error correction, and security testing. If you have such statutory rights, you will notify Lexmark in writing of any intended reverse engineering, reverse assembly, or reverse compilation. You may not decrypt the Software Program unless necessary for the legitimate Use of the Software Program.
9 ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE. This License Agreement applies to updates or supplements to the original Software Program provided by Lexmark unless Lexmark provides other terms along with the update or supplement.
10 TERM. This License Agreement is effective unless terminated or rejected. You may reject or terminate this license at any time by destroying all copies of the Software Program, together with all modifications, documentation, and merged portions in any form, or as otherwise described herein. Lexmark may terminate your license upon notice if you fail to comply with any of the terms of this License Agreement. Upon such termination, you agree to destroy all copies of the Software Program together with all modifications, documentation, and merged portions in any form.
11 TAXES. You agree that you are responsible for payment of any taxes including, without limitation, any goods and services and personal property taxes, resulting from this Agreement or your Use of the Software Program.
12 LIMITATION ON ACTIONS. No action, regardless of form, arising out of this Agreement may be brought by either party more than two years after the cause of action has arisen, except as provided under applicable law.
13 APPLICABLE LAW. This Agreement is governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Kentucky, United States of America. No choice of law rules in any jurisdiction shall apply. The UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply.
14 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software Program has been developed entirely at private expense. Rights of the United States Government to use the Software Program is as set forth in this Agreement and as restricted in DFARS 252.227-7014 and in similar FAR provisions (or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause).
15 CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Lexmark, its affiliates, and agents may collect and use information you provide in relation to support services performed with respect to the Software Program and requested by you. Lexmark agrees not to use this information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to provide such services.
16 EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You may not (a) acquire, ship, transfer, or reexport, directly or indirectly, the Software Program or any direct product therefrom, in violation of any applicable export laws or (b) permit the Software Program to be used for any purpose prohibited by such export laws, including, without limitation, nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation.
17 AGREEMENT TO CONTRACT ELECTRONICALLY. You and Lexmark agree to form this License Agreement electronically. This means that when you click the "Agree" or "Yes" button on this page or use this product, you acknowledge your agreement to these License Agreement terms and conditions and that you are doing so with the intent to "sign" a contract with Lexmark.
18 CAPACITY AND AUTHORITY TO CONTRACT. You represent that you are of the legal age of majority in the place you sign this License Agreement and, if applicable, you are duly authorized by your employer or principal to enter into this contract.
19 ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This License Agreement (including any addendum or amendment to this License Agreement that is included with the Software Program) is the entire agreement between you and Lexmark relating to the Software Program. Except as otherwise provided for herein, these terms and conditions supersede all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals, and representations with respect to the Software Program or any other subject matter covered by this License Agreement (except to the extent such extraneous terms do not conflict with the terms of this License Agreement, any other written agreement signed

by you and Lexmark relating to your Use of the Software Program). To the extent any Lexmark policies or programs for support services conflict with the terms of this License Agreement, the terms of this License Agreement shall control.

MICROSOFT CORPORATION NOTICES

1 This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369.
2 This product is based on Microsoft Print Schema technology. You may find the terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=83288.

ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED NOTICE

Contains Flash ^® , Flash ^® Lite ^™ and/or Reader ^® technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated

This Product contains Adobe ^® Flash ^® player software under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated, Copyright © 1995-2007 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC. All rights reserved. Adobe, Reader and Flash are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Index

Numerics

150 displayed 172

200 Paper jam 172

201.yy Paper jam <area

name> 172

202.yy Paper jam <area

name> 172

230.yy Paper jam <area

name> 172

235 Paper Jam Check Duplex 172

24x Paper Jam Check Tray 173

250.yy Paper jam <area

name> 173

250-sheet tray (standard)

loading 50

290–292 ADF Scanning Jams 173

293 Paper Missing 173

293.02 Flatbed Cover Open 173

294 ADF Jam 174

30.yy cartridge

missing 168

31 Defective Imaging Kit 168

34 Short paper 169

35 Insufficient memory to support

Resource Save feature 169

37 Insufficient memory to collate job 169

38 Memory Full 169

39 Complex page, some data may not have printed 169

40 Invalid refill, change cartridge 169

50 PPDS Font Error 169

51 Defective flash detected 170

52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 170

53 Unformatted flash

detected 170

54 Network Software

Error 170

550-sheet tray installing 30

550-sheet tray (optional)

loading 50

56 Standard USB Port Disabled 170

58 Input config error 171

58 Too many flash options

installed 170

58 Too many trays attached 171

59 Incompatible tray 171

650-sheet duo drawer

installing 30

loading 53

82 Replace waste toner box 171

82.yy Waste toner box missing 171

840.01 Scanner Disabled 174

840.02 Scanner Auto Disabled 174

88.yy Cartridge is low 172

88.yy Replace

Cartridge 172

900–999 Service 175

940.01 174

940.02 175

941.01 174

941.02 175

942.01 174

942.02 175

943.01 174

943.02 175

A

Access USB after scan 162

Access USB now 162

Active NIC menu 133

address book, e-mail

setting up 84

address book, fax

using 104

ADF

copying using 75

attaching cables 32

B

battery, clock 162

Black Low 163

Busy 162

buttons, printer control panel 17

C

cables

Ethernet 32

USB 32

Calibrating 162

Call complete 162

calling Customer Support 233

Cancel not available 162

Canceling 162

canceling a job

from Macintosh 73

from the printer control panel 73

from Windows 73

card stock

loading 54

tips on using 69

Check Config ID 162

checking an unresponsive

printer 206

checking an unresponsive

scanner 211

cleaning

exterior of the printer 201

scanner glass 202

clock battery 162

Close door 162

collating copies 80

configuration information

wireless network 35

configurations

printer 16

connecting the printer to

computer modem 98

conservation settings

Eco-Mode 45

Quiet Mode 46

conserving supplies 44

contacting Customer Support 233

control panel, printer 17

copy quality

adjusting 80

improving 82

Copy Settings menu 140

copy troubleshooting

copier does not respond 209

partial document or photo

copies 211

poor copy quality 210

poor scanned image quality 212

scanner unit does not close 209

copying

adjusting quality 80

canceling a copy job 82

collating copies 80

enlarging 79

from one size to another 77

improving copy quality 82

making a copy lighter or darker 79

multiple pages on one sheet 81

on both sides of the paper (duplexing) 78

photos 76

placing separator sheets between copies 81

quick copy 75

reducing 79

selecting a tray 78

to letterhead 77

to transparencies 76

using the ADF 75

using the scanner glass 76

Custom Scan Sizes menu 131

Custom Types menu 130

Cyan Low 163

D

date and time

setting 100

Default Source menu 123

Defective Cartridge 168

Dialing 163

directory list, printing 72

display troubleshooting display is blank 206

display shows only diamonds 206

display, printer control panel 17

distinctive ring service connecting to 91

DO NOT TOUCH 163

documents, printing from Macintosh computer 65 from Windows 65

duplexing 78

E

Eco-Mode setting 45

Embedded Web Server 204

administrator settings 204

does not open 233

networking settings 204

setting up e-mail alerts 205

Embedded Web Server

Administrator's Guide 204

emission

notices 235, 236, 239, 243, 244

enlarging a copy 79

envelopes

loading 54, 56

tips 67

environmental settings 44

Eco-Mode 45

Quiet Mode 46

Ethernet networking

Macintosh 40

Windows 40

Ethernet port 32

exterior of the printer

cleaning 201

e-mail

canceling 86

notice of low supply level 205

notice of paper jam 205

notice of paper needed 205

notice that different paper is needed 205

e-mail function

setting up 83

e-mailing

creating shortcuts using the

Embedded Web Server 84

setting up address book 84

setting up e-mail function 83

using shortcut numbers 85

using the address book 86

using the keypad 84

F

FAQ about color printing 230

fax

canceling 105

options 106

Fax complete 163

fax connection

connecting the printer to the wall jack 90

connecting to a distinctive ring service 91

connecting to a DSL line 90

connecting to a PBX or ISDN 91

Fax failed 163

fax quality, improving 107

Fax Settings menu 142

fax troubleshooting

blocking junk faxes 217

caller ID is not shown 213

can receive but not send faxes 216

can send but not receive faxes 215

cannot send or receive a fax 214

received fax has poor print quality 216

faxing

changing resolution 104

choosing a fax connection 89

connecting to a telephone 92

connecting to an answering machine 92

connecting to regional adapters 93

creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 102

creating shortcuts using the printer control panel 103

fax setup 88

forwarding faxes 107

improving fax quality 107

making a fax lighter or darker 104

sending a fax at a scheduled time 105

sending using the computer 101

sending using the printer control panel 101

setting the date and time 100

setting the outgoing fax name and number 100

turning daylight saving time on or off 100

using shortcuts 103

using the address book 104

viewing a fax log 105

FCC notices 235, 239, 243

features

Scan Center 112

fiber optic

network setup 40

File corrupt 163

finding information

customer support 13

publications 13

Finishing menu 151

flash drive 70

Flash Drive menu 148

flash drives

file types 71

flash memory card installing 27

Flushing buffer 163

font sample list printing 72

forwarding faxes 107

G

green settings Quiet Mode 46

guidelines card stock 69 envelopes 67 labels, paper 68 letterhead 66 transparencies 67

H

Hex Trace 163

|

Image menu 158

Imaging Kit 163

imaging kits ordering 178 replacing 182, 188

Incoming call 163

Insert Tray 163

installation wireless network 36, 38

installing fax options in driver 35 options in driver 35 printer software 34

installing printer software adding options 35

Invalid Engine Code 164

Invalid Network Code 164

J

jams avoiding 114 locating doors and trays 115 locations 115 numbers 115

jams, clearing 200 116 201 116 202 117 230 119 235 119

242 119 243 119 250 120 290 120

L

labels, paper tips on using 68

LADP connection error 164

letterhead copying to 77 loading, manual feeder 66 loading, trays 66 tips on using 66

light, indicator 17

Line busy 164 linking trays 48 Load with 164

Load single sheet feeder with 164

loading 250-sheet tray (standard) 50 650-sheet duo drawer 53 card stock 54 envelopes 54, 56 letterhead in manual feeder 66 letterhead in trays 66 manual feeder 56 multipurpose feeder 54 transparencies 54

M

Macintosh wireless network installation 38

Magenta Low 163

Maintenance 164

manual feeder loading 56

memory card installing 23 troubleshooting 219

Memory full, cannot send faxes 164

menu settings pages, printing 34 menus

Active NIC 133 Copy Settings 140 Custom Scan Sizes 131

Custom Types 130 Default Source 123

diagram of 122

Fax Settings 142

Finishing 151

Flash Drive 148

Image 158

Network 133

Paper Loading 129

Paper Size/Type 124

Paper Texture 126

PCL Emul 156

PDF 155

PictBridge 159

PostScript 156

Quality 153

Reports 132

Set Date and Time 160

Settings 137

Setup 151

Supplies 123

USB 135

Utilities 155

Wireless 134

Menus disabled 165

moving the printer 202, 203

multiple pages on one sheet 81

multipurpose feeder loading 54

N

Network menu 133

network setup page 34

Networking Guide 204

No analog phone line 165

No answer 165

No dial tone 165

No recognized file types 165

noise emission levels 236

notices 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243, 244

0

options

550-sheet tray 30

650-sheet duo drawer 30 fax 106

flash memory card 27

internal 23

memory card 23

memory cards 23

scan to computer 112

ordering

imaging kits 178

toner cartridges 177

waste toner bottle 178

P

paper

capacities 64

characteristics 58

letterhead 59

preprinted forms 59

recycled 43

selecting 59

selecting weight 128

setting size 49

setting type 49

storing 60

unacceptable 43, 59

Universal Paper Size 131

Universal size setting 49

paper feed troubleshooting

message remains after jam is cleared 219

paper jams

avoiding 114

Paper Loading menu 129

Paper Size/Type menu 124

paper sizes

supported by the printer 60

Paper Texture menu 126

paper types

supported by printer 61

where to load 61

paper types and weights

supported by the printer 62

PC Kit Life Warning 165

PCL Emul menu 156

PDF menu 155

Phone in Use 165

photos

copying 76

PictBridge menu 159

PictBridge-enabled printing photos 71

Picture too large 165

PostScript menu 156

Power Saver 165

adjusting 46

print job

canceling from Macintosh 73

canceling from the printer control panel 73

canceling from Windows 73

print quality

cleaning the scanner glass 202

replacing developer unit 195

replacing imaging kits 182, 188

replacing the waste toner bottle 179

print quality test pages,

printing 72

print quality troubleshooting

blank pages 220

characters have jagged edges 220

clipped images 221

color misregistration 229

dark lines 221

gray background 221

light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line 222

poor transparency quality 228

print irregularities 223

print is too dark 226

print is too light 224

repeating defects 224

skewed print 224

solid color pages 227

toner fog or background shading 227

toner rubs off 227

toner specks 228

uneven print density 229

print troubleshooting

error reading USB drive 206

incorrect margins 222

incorrect or strange characters print 208

jammed page does not reprint 219

job prints from wrong tray 208

job prints on wrong paper 208

job takes longer than expected 207

jobs do not print 207

Large jobs do not collate 208

multiple-language PDFs do not print 206

paper curl 223

paper frequently jams 219

tray linking does not work 208

unexpected page breaks occur 209

printer

configurations 16

minimum clearances 14

models 16

moving 202, 203

selecting a location 14

shipping 203

printer messages

150 displayed 172

200 Paper jam 172

201.yy Paper jam 172

202.yy Paper jam 172

230.yy Paper jam 172

235 Paper Jam Check Duplex 172

24x Paper Jam Check Tray 173

250.yy Paper jam 173

290–292 ADF Scanning Jams 173

293 Paper Missing 173

293.02 Flatbed Cover Open 173

294 ADF Jam 174

30.yy cartridge missing 168

31 Defective Imaging Kit 168

34 Short paper 169

35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 169

37 Insufficient memory to collate job 169

38 Memory Full 169

39 Complex page, some data may not have printed 169

40 Invalid refill, change cartridge 169

50 PPDS Font Error 169

51 Defective flash detected 170

52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 170

53 Unformatted flash detected 170

54 Network Software Error 170

56 Standard USB Port Disabled 170

58 Input config error 171

58 Too many flash options installed 170

58 Too many trays attached 171

59 Incompatible tray 171

82 Replace waste toner bottle 179

82 Replace waste toner box 171

82.yy Waste toner box missing 171

840.01 Scanner Disabled 174

840.02 Scanner Auto Disabled 174

88 Replace Cartridge 193

88.yy Cartridge is low 172

88.yy Replace Cartridge 172

900–999 Service 175

940.01 174

940.02 175

941.01 174

941.02 175

942.01 174

942.02 175

943.01 174

943.02 175

Access USB after scan 162

Access USB now 162

Black Low 163

Busy 162

Calibrating 162

Call complete 162

Cancel not available 162

Canceling 162

Check Config ID 162

clock battery 162

Close door 162

Cyan Low 163

Defective Cartridge 168

Dialing 163

DO NOT TOUCH 163

Fax complete 163

Fax failed 163

File corrupt 163

Flushing buffer 163

Hex Trace 163

Imaging Kit 163

Incoming call 163

Insert Tray 163

Invalid Engine Code 164

Invalid Network Code 164

LADP connection error 164

Line busy 164

Load with 164

Load single sheet feeder with 164

Magenta Low 163

Maintenance 164

Memory full, cannot send faxes 164

Menus disabled 165

No analog phone line 165

No answer 165

No dial tone 165

No recognized file types 165

PC Kit Life Warning 165

Phone in Use 165

Picture too large 165

Power Saver 165

Printing error 166

Programming Code 166

Reading data 166

Reading error 166

Ready 166

Receiving pXX 166

Reload printed pages in Tray 166

Remote Management Active 166

Remove originals from the scanner ADF 166

Remove packaging material 166

Remove paper from standard output bin 166

Replace cartridge 167

Replace Black Imaging Kit 182

Replace Color Imaging Kit 188

Replace PC Kit 167

Replace Unsupported Cartridge 169

Scan Document Too Long 167

Scan to USB failed 167

Scanner ADF Cover Open 167

Sending pXX 167

Standard Exit Bin Full 167

Tray Empty 167

Tray Low 167

Tray Missing 168

Unsupported Mode 168

Unsupported USB device, please remove 168

Unsupported USB hub, please remove 168

USB drive disabled 168

Use camera controls to print 168

Waiting 168

Waiting, too many events 168

Yellow Low 163

printer options troubleshooting drawers 218

memory card 219

multipurpose feeder 218

option not working 217

printer problems, solving

basic 206

printing

directory list 72

flash drives 71

font sample list 72

from flash drive 70

from Macintosh computer 65

from Windows 65

installing printer software 34

menu settings pages 34

network setup page 34

photos 71

print quality test pages 72

Printing error 166

Programming Code 166

Q

Quality menu 153

Quiet Mode 46

R

Reading data 166

Reading error 166

Ready 166

Receiving pXX 166

recycled paper using 43

recycling 237

Lexmark packaging 47

Lexmark products 47

toner cartridges 47

WEEE statement 236

reducing a copy 79

reducing noise 46

Reload printed pages in Tray 166

Remote Management Active 166

Remove originals from the scanner ADF 166

Remove packaging material 166

Remove paper from standard output bin 166

Replace cartridge 167

Replace PC Kit 167

Replace Unsupported

Cartridge 169

reports

viewing 205

Reports menu 132

resolution, fax

changing 104

restoring factory default

settings 204

S

safety information 11, 12

Scan Center features 112

Scan Document Too Long 167

scan quality, improving 112

scan to computer options 112

Scan to USB failed 167

scan troubleshooting cannot scan from a computer 213

partial document or photo scans 213

scan was not successful 212

scanner unit does not close 209

scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 212

ScanBack Utility using the ScanBack Utility 113

scanner Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) 17

functions 16

scanner glass 17

Scanner ADF Cover Open 167

scanner glass

cleaning 202

copying using 76

scanning to a computer 110

improving scan quality 112

scanning to a USB flash memory device 111

scanning to an FTP address creating shortcuts using the computer 109

using shortcut numbers 109

using the keypad 108

Sending pXX 167

Set Date and Time menu 160

setting

Active NIC 133

paper size 49

paper type 49

Universal Paper Size 49

setting up the printer

on a wired network (Macintosh) 40

on a wired network (Windows) 40

Settings menu 137

Setup menu 151

shipping the printer 203

shortcuts, creating e-mail 84

fax destination 102, 103

FTP destination 109

Standard Exit Bin Full 167

standard tray loading 50

status of supplies, checking 176

storing

paper 60

supplies 176

supplies

conserving 44

status of 176

storing 176

Supplies menu 123

supplies, ordering imaging kits 178

toner cartridges 177

waste toner bottle 178

T

telecommunication

notices 239, 240, 241, 242

toner cartridges

ordering 177

recycling 47

replacing 193

transparencies

copying to 76

loading 54

tips on using 67

Tray Empty 167

Tray Low 167

Tray Missing 168

tray linking 48

tray unlinking 48

trays

linking 48

unlinking 48

troubleshooting

checking an unresponsive printer 206

checking an unresponsive scanner 211

contacting Customer Support 233

FAQ about color printing 230

solving basic printer problems 206

troubleshooting, copy

copier does not respond 209

partial document or photo copies 211

poor copy quality 210

poor scanned image quality 212

scanner unit does not close 209

troubleshooting, display

display is blank 206

display shows only diamonds 206

troubleshooting, fax

blocking junk faxes 217

caller ID is not shown 213

can receive but not send faxes 216

can send but not receive faxes 215

cannot send or receive a fax 214

received fax has poor print quality 216

troubleshooting, paper feed

message remains after jam is cleared 219

troubleshooting, print

error reading USB drive 206

incorrect margins 222

incorrect or strange characters print 208

jammed page does not reprint 219

job prints from wrong tray 208

job prints on wrong paper 208

job takes longer than expected 207

jobs do not print 207

Large jobs do not collate 208

multiple-language PDFs do not print 206

paper curl 223

paper frequently jams 219

tray linking does not work 208

unexpected page breaks occur 209

troubleshooting, print quality blank pages 220

characters have jagged edges 220

clipped images 221

color misregistration 229 dark lines 221

gray background 221

light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line 222

poor transparency quality 228

print irregularities 223

print is too dark 226

print is too light 224

repeating defects 224

skewed print 224

solid color pages 227

toner fog or background shading 227

toner rubs off 227

toner specks 228

uneven print density 229

troubleshooting, printer options drawers 218

memory card 219

multipurpose feeder 218

option not working 217

troubleshooting, scan

cannot scan from a computer 213

partial document or photo scans 213

scan was not successful 212

scanner unit does not close 209

scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 212

U

Universal Paper Size 131 setting 49

Universal Setup menu 131

unlinking trays 48

Unsupported Mode 168

Unsupported USB device, please

remove 168

Unsupported USB hub, please

remove 168

USB drive disabled 168

USB menu 135

USB port 32

Use camera controls to print 168

Utilities menu 155

V

viewing

reports 205

W

Waiting 168

Waiting, too many events 168

waste toner bottle

ordering 178

replacing 179

Windows

wireless network installation 36

wired network setup

using Windows 40

wired networking

using Macintosh 40

Wireless menu 134

wireless network

configuration information 35

installation, using Macintosh 38

installation, using Windows 36

Y

Yellow Low 163

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : LEXMARK

Model : X544dn

Category : Printer